INSTALLATION MANUAL

INSTALLATION MANUAL

FILE NO. A05-018

R410A

Heat Recovery Type (2 Series)

Indoor Unit

<4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type>

MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H,

MMU-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,

MMU-AP0301H, AP0361H, AP0481H

MMU-AP0561H


MMU-AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH,

MMU-AP0151WH, AP0181WH, AP0241WH,

MMU-AP0271WH, AP0301WH, AP0481WH*

* CHINA market only


MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH,

MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH, AP0241SH

<Concealed Duct Standard Type>

MMD-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH,



MMD-AP0481BH, AP0561BH

<Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type>

MMD-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,

MMD-AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0721H,

MMD-AP0961H

<Under Ceiling Type>

MMC-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,

MMC-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

<High Wall Type>

MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,

MMK-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,

MMK-AP0072H*, AP0092H*, AP0122H*

* European market only

<Floor Standing Cabinet Type>

MML-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,

MML-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

<Floor Standing Concealed Type>

MML-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH,

MML-AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH

<Floor Standing Type>

MMF-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

MMF-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

MMF-AP0561H

Outdoor Unit

<Inverter Unit>

MMY-MAP0802FT8

MMY-MAP1002FT8

MMY-MAP1202FT8

FS unit

RBM-Y1122FE

RBM-Y1802FE

RBM-Y2802FE

PRINTED IN JAPAN, 2005

WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE

Check of Concentration Limit

The room in which the air conditioner is to be installed requires a design that in the event of refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will not exceed a set limit.

The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent increase in the number of high concentration buildings, however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems is on the increase because of the need for effective use of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by curtailing heat and carrying power etc.

Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small room, select a suitable model and installation procedure so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event of an emergency, measures can be made before injury can occur).

In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit, create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak detection device.

The concentration is as given below.

Total amount of refrigerant (kg)

Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)

≤ Concentration limit (kg/m³)

The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.

(For details, refer and comply with local regulations.)

NOTE 1 :

If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be as charged in each independent device.

e.g., charged amount (10kg)

Outdoor unit e.g., charged amount (15kg)

Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F

Indoor unit

For the amount of charge in this example:

The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in rooms A, B and C is 10kg.

The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in rooms D, E and F is 15kg.

Important

NOTE 2 :

The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.

(1) No partition (shaded portion)

(2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door).

Outdoor unit

Refrigerant piping

Indoor unit

(3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the smallest room of course becomes the object. But when a mechanical ventilation is installed interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume of the next smallest room becomes the object.

Refrigerant piping

Outdoor unit

Very small room

Indoor unit

Small room

Medium room

Large room

Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector

NOTE 3 :

The minimum indoor floor area compared with the amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:

(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)

40 m²

35

30

25

Range below the density limit of 0.3 kg/m³

(countermeasures not needed)

20

15

10

5

0

Range above the density limit of 0.3 kg/m³

(countermeasures needed)

10 20 30

Total amount of refrigerant kg

NOTE

A direct current motor is adopted for indoor fan motor in the Concealed Duct Standard Type air conditioner.

Caused from its characteristics, a current limit works on the direct current motor. When replacing the highperformance filter or when opening the service board, be sure to stop the fan. If an above action is executed during the fan operation, the protective control works to stop the unit operation, and the check code “P12” may be issued. However it is not a trouble. When the desired operation has finished, be sure to reset the system to clear “P12” error code using the leak breaker of the indoor unit. Then push the operation stop button of the remote controller to return to the usual operation.

CONTENTS

1.

SELECTING A LOCATION FOR INSTALLATION ................................. 4

2.

SAFETY NOTES ...................................................................................... 8

3.

CHECK POINTS ...................................................................................... 9

4.

KEY POINTS OF AIR CONDITIONER INSTALLATION ...................... 10

5.

REFRIGERANT PIPE INSTALLATION ................................................. 11

6.

INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 43

7.

FLOW SELECTOR UNIT INSTALLATION ........................................... 82

8.

OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ........................................................ 88

9.

ELECTRIC WIRING ................................................................................ 95

10.

INDOOR UNIT TERMINAL BOARD PLACEMENT AND WIRING..... 111

11.

DRAIN PIPE INSTALLATION .............................................................. 117

12.

ADJUSTMENT OF AIR DIRECTION .................................................. 126

13.

APPLIED CONTROL ........................................................................... 131

14.

ADDRESS SETUP ............................................................................... 135

15.

TEST OPERATION .............................................................................. 148

16.

SUPPORT FUNCTION IN TEST OPERATION ................................... 157

17.

TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 180

18.

AIR SPEED CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................... 185

19.

FAN CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................. 190

CAUTION

New Refrigerant Air Conditioner Installation

• THIS AIR CONDITIONER ADOPTS THE NEW HFC REFRIGERANT (R410A) WHICH DOES

NOT DESTROY OZONE LAYER.

The characteristics of R410A refrigerant are ; easy to absorb water, oxidizing membrane or oil, and its pressure is approx. 1.6 times higher than that of refrigerant R22. Accompanied with the new refrigerant, refrigerating oil has also been changed. Therefore, during installation work, be sure that water, dust, former refrigerant, or refrigerating oil does not enter the refrigerating cycle.

To prevent charging an incorrect refrigerant and refrigerating oil, the sizes of connecting sections of charging port of the main unit and installation tools are charged from those for the conventional refrigerant.

Accordingly the exclusive tools are required for the new refrigerant (R410A).

For connecting pipes, use new and clean piping designed for R410A, and please care so that water or dust does not enter. Moreover, do not use the existing piping because there are problems with pressure-resistance force and impurity in it.

1. SELECTING A LOCATION FOR INSTALLATION

WARNING

Install the air conditioner certainly at a location to sufficiently withstand the weight.

If the strength is insufficient, the unit may fall down resulting in human injury.

Perform a specified installation work to guard against a great wind such as typhoon or an earth quake.

An incomplete installation can cause accidents by the units failing and dropping.

The following models must be installed at height 2.5m or more from the floor.

(Concealed type duct type and cassette type air conditioners)

If you insert your hands or others directly into the unit while the air conditioner operates, it is dangerous because you may contact with revolving fan or active electricity.

Installation Location Selection for Outdoor unit

Obtain permission from the customer to install the unit in a location that satisfies the following requirements :

• A location that permits level installation of the unit.

• A location that provides enough space to service the unit safety

• A location where water draining from the unit will not pose a problem

Avoid installing in the following places.

• Place exposed to air with high salt content (seaside area), or place exposed to large quantities of sulfide gas (hot spring). (Should the unit be used in these places, special protective measures are needed.)

• Place exposed to oil, vapor, oil smoke or corrosive gas.

• Place where organic solvent is used nearby.

• Place close to a machine generating high frequency.

• Place where the discharged air blows directly into the window of the neighboring house. (For outdoor unit)

• Place where noise of the outdoor unit is easily transmitted.

(When installing the air conditioner on the boundary with the neighbor, pay due attention to the level of noise.)

• Place with poor ventilation.

(Especially in Concealed duct type indoor unit, before air ducting work, check whether value of air volume, static pressure and duct resistance are correct.)

4

Equipments

1. Outdoor units

Corresponding HP

Model name

8 HP

Inverter unit

10 HP 12 HP

MMY- MAP0802FT8 MAP1002FT8 MAP1202FT8

Cooling capacity (kW) 22.4 28.0 33.5

Appearance

Heating capacity (kW) 25.0 31.5

2. Outdoor units (Combination of outdoor units)


Combined model

Cooling capacity (kW)

Heating capacity (kW)

MMY-

8HP

MAP0802FT8

22.4

25

8HP

10HP

MAP1002FT8

28

31.5

10HP

Combined outdoor units

No. of connectable indoor units


Combined model

MMY-

Cooling capacity (kW)

Heating capacity (kW)

Combined outdoor units

No. of connectable indoor units

13

20HP

AP2002FT8

56

63

10HP

10HP

33

16

24HP

AP2402FT8

68

76.5

8HP

8HP

8HP

40

Allocation standard of model name

MMY– M AP F T 8

35.5

12HP

MAP1202FT8

33.5

35.5

12HP

16

26HP

AP2602FT8

73

81.5

10HP

8HP

8HP

43

16HP

AP1602FT8

45

50

8HP

8HP

27

28HP

AP2802FT8

78.5

88

10HP

10HP

8HP

47

Power supply specifications, 3Ø 380–415 V, 50Hz ....... 8

T : Capacity variable unit

F : Heat recovery

Development series No.

Capacity rank HP x 10

New refrigerant R410A

M : Single module unit, No mark : Combined Model name

Modular Multi

18HP

AP1802FT8

50.4

56.5

10HP

8HP

30

30HP

AP3002FT8

84

95

10HP

10HP

10HP

48

3. FS units (Flow selector units)

Model name

RBM-Y1122FE

Inverter unit

Total capacity for indoor unit : below 11.2kW

RBM-Y1802FE Total capacity for indoor unit : 11.2 to below 18.0kW

RBM-Y2802FE Total capacity for indoor unit : 18.0 to 28.0kW or less

∗ Accessory part : Connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE), up to 15m.

5

Appearance

3. Indoor units

Type Appearance

4-way Air Discharge

Cassette Type

2-way Air Discharge

Cassette Type

1-way Air Discharge

Cassette Type

Concealed Duct

Standard Type

Concealed Duct

High Static

Pressure Type

Under Ceiling Type

High Wall Type

(1 Series)

High Wall Type

(2 Series) *

2)

Floor Standing

Cabinet Type

Floor Standing

Concealed Type

Floor Standing Type

Model name

MMD-AP0481BH

MMD-AP0561BH

MMD-AP0181H

MMD-AP0241H

MMD-AP0271H

MMD-AP0361H

MMD-AP0481H

MMD-AP0721H

MMD-AP0961H

MMC-AP0151H

MMC-AP0181H

MMC-AP0241H

MMC-AP0271H

MMC-AP0361H

MMC-AP0481H

MMK-AP0071H

MMK-AP0091H

MMK-AP0121H

MMK-AP0151H

MMK-AP0181H

MMK-AP0241H

MMK-AP0072H

MMK-AP0092H

MMK-AP0122H

MML-AP0071H

MML-AP0091H

MML-AP0121H

MML-AP0151H

MML-AP0181H

MML-AP0241H

MML-AP0071BH

MML-AP0091BH

MML-AP0121BH

MML-AP0151BH

MML-AP0181BH

MML-AP0241BH

MMF-AP0151H

MMF-AP0181H

MMF-AP0241H

MMF-AP0271H

MMF-AP0361H

MMF-AP0481H

MMF-AP0561H

MMU-AP0091H

MMU-AP0121H

MMU-AP0151H

MMU-AP0181H

MMU-AP0241H

MMU-AP0271H

MMU-AP0301H

MMU-AP0361H

MMU-AP0481H

MMU-AP0561H

MMU-AP0071WH

MMU-AP0091WH

MMU-AP0121WH

MMU-AP0151WH

MMU-AP0181WH

MMU-AP0241WH

MMU-AP0271WH

MMU-AP0301WH

MMU-AP0481WH*

1)

MMU-AP0071YH

MMU-AP0091YH

MMU-AP0121YH

MMU-AP0151SH

MMU-AP0181SH

MMU-AP0241SH

MMD-AP0071BH

MMD-AP0091BH

MMD-AP0121BH

MMD-AP0151BH

MMD-AP0181BH

MMD-AP0241BH

MMD-AP0271BH

MMD-AP0301BH

MMD-AP0361BH

036 type

048 type

056 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

036 type

048 type

072 type

096 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

036 type

048 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

036 type

048 type

056 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

030 type

036 type

048 type

056 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

030 type

048 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

030 type

Capacity rank Capacity code

Cooling capacity (kW)

Heating capacity (kW)

1.7

2

2.5

3

3.2

5

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2

2.5

0.8

1

1.25

6

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2

2.5

3

3.2

1

1.25

1.7

2

4

5

2.5

3

3.2

14.0

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

2.2

2.8

3.6

16.0

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

8.0

9.0

4.5

5.6

7.1

8.0

9.0

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

8.0

9.0

11.2

14.0

4

5

1.7

2

2.5

3

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2

8

10

4

5

6

2

4

5

2.5

3

2.5

0.8

1.0

1.25

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2

2.5

11.2

14.0

16.0

5.6

7.1

8.0

11.2

14.0

22.4

28.0

4.5

5.6

7.1

8.0

11.2

14.0

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

2.2

2.8

3.6

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

1.7

2

2.5

3

4

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2

2.5

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

5.6

7.1

4.5

5.6

7.1

8.0

11.2

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

12.5

5

6

14.0

16.0

16.0

18.0

*1) China market only *2) European market only

5.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

12.5

16.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

12.5

16.0

18.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

12.5

16.0

25.0

31.5

8.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

16.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

18.0

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

10.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

10.0

3.2

4.0

5.0

6.3

8.0

9.0

10.0

12.5

16.0

6

Tools

Required Tools

The used refrigerating oil is changed, and mixing of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary, etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.

(1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))

(2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)

(3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)

The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.

Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)

Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability

No.

Used tool

j k l e f g h i c d

Flare tool

Copper pipe gauge for adjusting projection margin

Torque wrench

Gauge manifold

Charge hose

Vacuum pump adapter

Electronic balance for refrigerant charging

Refrigerant cylinder

Leakage detector

Charging cylinder

Usage

Pipe flaring

Flaring by conventional flare tool

R410A air conditioner installation

Existence of new equipment for R410A

Yes

Whether conventional equipment can be used

*(Note 1)

Conventional air conditioner installation

Whether new equipment can be used with conventional refrigerant

{

Yes *(Note 1) *(Note 1)

Connection of flare nut

Evacuating, refrigerant charge, run check, etc.

Vacuum evacuating

Refrigerant charge

Refrigerant charge

Gas leakage check

Refrigerant charge

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(Note 2)

×

×

×

Yes

×

×

×

×

×

×

{

×

{

{

(Note 1) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.

(Note 2) Charging cylinder for R410A is being currently developed.

General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)

In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary as the general tools.

(1) Vacuum pump

Use vacuum pump by attaching vacuum pump adapter.

(2) Torque wrench

(3) Pipe cutter

(4) Reamer

(5) Pipe bender

(6) Level vial

(7) Screwdriver (+, –)

(8) Spanner or Monkey wrench

(9) Hole core drill

(10) Hexagon wrench

(Opposite side 4mm)

(11) Tape measure

(12) Metal saw

Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.

(1) Clamp meter

(2) Thermometer

(3) Insulation resistance tester

(4) Electroscope

7

2. SAFETY NOTES

• Ensure that all Local, National and International regulations are satisfied.

• Read this “SAFETY NOTES” carefully before Installation.

• The precautions described below include the important items regarding safety. Observe them without fail.

• After the installation work, perform a trial operation to check for any problem.

Follow the Owner’s Manual to explain how to use and maintain the unit to the customer.

• Turn off the main power supply switch (or breaker) before the unit maintenance.

• Ask the customer to keep the Installation Manual together with the Owner’s Manual.

WARNING

• Ask an authorized dealer or qualified installation professional to install/maintain the air conditioner.

Inappropriate installation may result in water leakage, electric shock or fire.

• Turn off the main power supply switch or breaker before attempting any electrical work.

Make sure all power switches are off. Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

• Connect the connecting wire correctly.

If the connecting wire is connected in a wrong way, electric parts may be damaged.

• When moving the air conditioner for the installation into another place, be very careful not to enter any gaseous matter other than the specified refrigerant into the refrigeration cycle.

If air or any other gas is mixed in the refrigerant, the gas pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high and it as a result causes pipe burst and injuries on persons.

• Do not modify this unit by removing any of the safety guards or by by-passing any of the safety interlock switches.

• Exposure of unit to water or other moisture before installation may cause a short-circuit of electrical parts.

Do not store it in a wet basement or expose to rain or water.

• After unpacking the unit, examine it carefully if there are possible damage.

• Do not install in a place that might increase the vibration of the unit.

• To avoid personal injury (with sharp edges), be careful when handling parts.

• Perform installation work properly according to the Installation Manual.

Inappropriate installation may result in water leakage, electric shock or fire.

• When the air conditioner is installed in a small room, provide appropriate measures to ensure that the concentration of refrigerant leakage occur in the room does not exceed the critical level.

• Install the air conditioner securely in a location where the base can sustain the weight adequately.

• Perform the specified installation work to guard against an earthquake.

If the air conditioner is not installed appropriately, accidents may occur due to the falling unit.

• If refrigerant gas has leaked during the installation work, ventilate the room immediately.

If the leaked refrigerant gas comes in contact with fire, noxious gas may generate.

• After the installation work, confirm that refrigerant gas does not leak.

If refrigerant gas leaks into the room and flows near a fire source, such as a cooking range, noxious gas might generate.

• Electrical work must be performed by a qualified electrician in accordance with the Installation

Manual. Make sure the air conditioner uses an exclusive power supply.

An insufficient power supply capacity or inappropriate installation may cause fire.

• Use the specified wires for wiring connect the terminals securely fix. To prevent external forces applied to the terminals from affecting the terminals.

• Conform to the regulations of the local electric company when wiring the power supply.

Inappropriate grounding may cause electric shock.

• Do not install the air conditioner in a location subject to a risk of exposure to a combustible gas.

If a combustible gas leaks, and stays around the unit, a fire may occur.

8

3. CHECK POINTS

Check before operation

• Turn on the main power switch 12 hours or more before starting the operation.

• Check whether earth wire is disconnected or out of place.

• Check that air filter is installed to the indoor unit.

Heating capacity

• For heating operation, a heat pump type which absorbs the outdoor heat and deliver the heat in the room is adopted.

If the outdoor temperature lowers, the heating capacity decreases.

• When the outdoor temperature is low, common use with other heating devices is recommended.

Defrost operation in heating operation

• If frost is found on the outdoor unit during heating operation, the defrost operation starts automatically (for approx. 2 to 10 minutes) so as to increase the heating effect.

• During defrost operation, the fans of both indoor and outdoor units stop.

Protection for 3 minutes

• The outdoor unit does not operate for approx. 3 minutes after air conditioner has been immediately restarted after stop, or power switch has been turned on. This is to protect the system.

Main power failure

• If a power failure occurs during operation, all operations stop.

• When the power is turned on after power failure, the operation lamp of the remote controller flashes to notify.

• When restarting the operation, push ON/OFF button again.

Fan rotation of stopped unit

• While other indoor units operate, the fan on indoor units on “stand-by” rotates to protect the machine once per approx. 1 hour for several minutes.

Protective device (High pressure switch)

The high pressure switch operate the air conditioner automatically stops when excessive load is applied to the air conditioner. If the protective device works, the operation lamp keeps lit but the operation stops.

When the protective device works, “CHECK” characters in the remote controller display section flash.

The protective device may work in the following cases.

Cooling

• When air inlet or outlet of the outdoor unit is closed.

• When strong wind blows continuously against air outlet of the outdoor unit.

Heating

• When much dust or dirt is excessively adhered to air filter of the indoor unit.

• When air outlet of the indoor unit is blocked.

NOTE

If the protective device works, turn off the main power switch, remove the cause, and then restart the operation.

Cooling/ heating operation of Multi system air conditioner

• When COOL or HEAT mode is fixed by the manager of the air conditioner, other operation than the set mode is unavailable. If other operation than the set mode has been performed, [ PRE-HEAT] or [ Operation ready] on the operation part goes on and the operation stops.

Operating temperature of Super HRM

• When outdoor temperature goes out of specified range, “ or ” mark is indicated on the remote controller display and required operation will stop. “ & ” : When heating operation. “ ” : When cooling operation.

[Notice]

• This indication is not failure.

• When outdoor temperature goes back to specified range, “ or ” disappear and start normal operation.

• Operation stops because concurrent operation can not be kept in the condition of out of specification for Super HRM.

(Outdoor temp. (DB) < –10°C : Cooling, > 21°C : Heating)

• Do not use “Super HRM” for other than personal usage where the ambient temperature may go down below –10°C.

(For example, OA equipment/Electric device/Food/Animals and plants/Art object)

Characteristics of heating operation

• Air does not blow out immediately after start of the operation. When the indoor heat exchanger has been heated after 3 to 5 minutes passed (differs according to temperature of indoor/outdoor temperature), hot air starts blowing.

• During operation, the outdoor unit may stop when outdoor temperature becomes high.

• When other indoor unit performs heating operation during fan operation, fan operation may be stopped temporarily to prevent discharge of hot air.

9

4.

KEY POINTS OF AIR CONDITIONER INSTALLATION

In order to prevent problems before they arise, carefully read (1) the Installation Manual provided with the equipment, and (2) the Owner’s Manual before installing the air conditioner.

4-1. Flow of Air Conditioner Installation Work

(Prior to Installation)

Determination of extent of installation work

Clearly determine the extent of the installation work.

Drafting of diagrams

Draft :

• Control wiring system diagram

• Refrigerant line system diagram

• Power wiring system diagram

(Installation)

Sleeve/insert installation

Pay careful attention to the downward slope of the drain pipe.

Indoor unit and flow selector unit installation

Refrigerant pipe installation

Be sure to check the name of the model in order to avoid any installation mistakes. If the model has an installation pattern, attach the pattern to the ceiling to mark the position of the ceiling openings and to keep dust away.

Make sure that the pipe system is dry, clean, and airtight.

When brazing pipes, blow out the system with nitrogen gas.

Do not forget the system indications.

(to outdoor outlet)

Drain pipe installation

Pipes should have downward slope (of at least 1/100).

Duct installation

Insulation work

Make sure the duct is large enough to carry the desired volume of air.

Be careful not to make any errors in the external static pressure calculations.

Be especially careful to close off all gaps where connections are made to the indoor unit, and at joints in the branching kit. Do not forget the drain pipes.

Electrical work

(control wires and power wires)

Various switch settings

Outdoor unit base installation

Outdoor unit installation

Use two-core shielded wires for the control wires, and use separate power supplies for the indoor and outdoor units. For connecting the flow selector unit, be sure to use the attached cable or connection cable kit sold separately.

Set the switches correctly, as indicated in the control wiring system diagram.

Make sure that the base is level.

Provide for adequate air flow and service space around the outdoor unit. Indicate the system names clearly.

Outside circulation, refrigerant pipe installation

From outside outlet to outdoor unit.

Gas-leak test

Vacuum suction

Addition of refrigerant

Ceiling panel installation

Test operation and adjustment

Owner’s Manual transfer

In the final test, the system must be pressurized at 3.73MPa

(38kg/cm²G) for 24 hours with no decrease in pressure.

Use a vacuum pump with reverse flaw prevention adaptor with a large output volume and that can achieve a high level of vacuum.

Record the amount of refrigerant that was added to the system on both the outdoor unit and on the pre-test operation checklist.

Make sure that the ceiling panel is attached to the ceiling material tightly, with no gaps.

Operate the indoor units one by one, making sure that all wiring and pipes are connected correctly, and fill out the checklist.

Explain how to operate the system clearly and concisely.

The procedure described above presents only the general sequence of steps; the sequence of steps may have to be altered according to the circumstances of any specific installation job.

10

5. REFRIGERANT PIPE INSTALLATION

5-1. Work Procedure

Indoor unit installation

Sizing the pipes

Preliminary installation

Flaring

Nitrogen gas blow

Vacuum suction

Brazing

Flushing

Leak test

5-2. Three Principles of Refrigerant Pipes

<Observe the three principles of refrigerant pipes>

Preventing Problems

Dry

Causes of Problems

• Moisture (in the form of rainwater or water used during installation, for example) getting inside of the pipes

• Moisture from condensation forming or seeping into the pipes

Clean

• Oxidation inside pipes during brazing

• Dirt, dust, or foreign matter getting inside pipes

Careful handling of pipes

Flushing

Nitrogen gas blow

Careful handling of pipes

Vacuum suction

Flushing

Airtight

• Poor brazing

• Poor flaring

Use of suitable materials

(copper pipes, solder, etc.)

Perform basic work of brazing carefully

Perform basic work of flaring carefully

Leak test

<Three principles of refrigerant pipes>

Dry

Make sure there is no moisture inside of the pipes

Clean

Make sure there is no dirt inside of the pipes

Moisture

Dirt

Airtight

Make sure the refrigerant does not leak

Leak

NOT GOOD NOT GOOD

11

NOT GOOD

5-3. Selecting the Refrigerant Line Material

• Refrigerant pipes

• Material: Phosphoric deoxidized seam-less pipe

• Capacity code of outdoor unit / indoor unit













• For each indoor unit, the capacity code is determined for every capacity rank.

• For each outdoor unit, the capacity code is determined for every capacity rank. The Max. number of the connectable indoor units and the total capacity code value of the indoor units are also determined.

Against the capacity code of the outdoor unit, the total capacity codes of the connectable indoor units differ according to the height difference between indoor units.

• When the height difference between indoor units is 15m or less : Up to 135%

( * For 12HP system, up to 120%.)

* of capacity code of outdoor unit

• When the height difference between indoor units is above 15m : Up to 105% of capacity code of outdoor unit













Table 1

Indoor unit

Capacity code

HP

Equivalent to capacity

007 type

009 type

012 type

015 type

018 type

024 type

027 type

030 type

036 type

048 type

056 type

072 type

096 type

6

8

10

4

5

2

2.5

3

3.2

0.8

1

1.25

1.7

2.2

2.8

3.6

4.5

8

9

5.6

7.1

11.2

14

16

22.4

28.0

Table 2

Outdoor unit model name

MMY-MAP0802FT8

MMY-MAP1002FT8

MMY-MAP1202FT8

MMY-AP1602FT8

MMY-AP1802FT8

MMY-AP2002FT8

MMY-AP2402FT8

MMY-AP2602FT8

MMY-AP2802FT8

MMY-AP3002FT8

Capacity code

Equivalent to

HP

8

10

12

16

18

20

24

26

28

30


22.4

28.0

33.5

45.0

50.4

56.0

68.0

73.0

78.5

84.0

No. of indoor units

30

33

40

43

47

48

13

16

16

27

Total capacity code of connectable indoor units

Min Max.

Equivalent to HP

5.6

7.0

8.4

11.2

12.6

14.0

16.8

18.2

19.6

21.0


10.8

13.5

14.4

21.6

24.3

27.0

32.4

35.1

37.8

40.5

Table 3

No.

Piping parts

c

Outdoor unit

↓

T-shape branching joint

Name

Connecting pipe of outdoor unit d

Between T-shape branching joints

Main connecting piping between of outdoor units

Balance pipe e

T-shape joint of header unit

↓

1st branching section

Main pipe f

Branching section

↓

Branching section

Branching pipe

Selection of pipe size

1) Connecting pipe outdoor unit

Model name

MMY-MAP0802FT8

MMY-MAP1002 FT8

MMY-MAP1202 FT8

Suction gas side Discharge gas side

Ø22.2

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

Ø28.6

Ø19.1

Ø19.1

2) Pipe size for connecting piping between outdoor units

Total capacity codes of outdoor units at downstream side



Below 61.5

Below 22

Suction gas side

Ø28.6

Discharge gas side

Ø22.2

Liquid side

Ø12.7

Ø12.7

Ø12.7

Liquid side

Balance pipe

Ø15.9

Ø9.5

3) Size of main pipe

Total capacity codes of all outdoor units



Below 33.5

33.5

45.0 to below 61.5

61.5 to below 73.0

73.0 or more

Below 12

12

16 to below 22

22 to below 26

26 or more


Ø22.2

Ø28.6

Ø28.6

Ø34.9

Ø34.9


Ø19.1

Ø 19.1

Ø22.2

Ø28.6

Ø28.6

Liquid side

Ø12.7

Ø12.7

Ø19.1

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

4) Pipe size between branching sections

Total capacity codes of indoor units at downstream side



Below 18.0

18.0 to below 34.0

34.0 to below 56.5

56.5 to below 70.5

70.5 or more

Below 6.4

6.4 to below 12.2

12.2 to below 20.2

20.2 to below 25.2

25.2 or more


Ø15.9

Ø22.2

Ø28.6

Ø34.9

Ø34.9


Ø12.7

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

Ø28.6

Ø28.6

Liquid side

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø15.9

Ø19.1

∗ If exceeding the main pipe size, decide the size same to main pipe size.

∗ When two pipes are used for the circuits exclusive to cooling, use pipes at liquid and suction gas sides.

∗ 2 pipes from FS unit to branching section shall be used with liquid pipe and suction gas pipe.

12

No.

Piping parts

g

End branching section

↓

Flow selector unit

Name

Connecting pipe of flow selector unit

Selection of pipe size

5) Pipe size between end branching section and flow selector unit

Total capacity codes of indoor units at downstream side

Equivalent to capacity Equivalent to HP

Below 18.0

18.0 or more

Below 6.4

6.4 or more


Ø15.9

Ø22.2


Ø12.7

Ø19.1

Liquid side

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

h

Branching section or flow selector unit

Connecting pipe of indoor unit

6) Connecting pipe size of indoor unit

Capacity rank

007 to 012 type

015 to 018 type

024 to 056 type

072 to 096 type

Gas side

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø22.2

Liquid side

Ø6.4

↓

Indoor unit

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

i j k l

Branching section Piping of cooling only indoor unit

(Between branching and indoor unit)

Branching section Branching

Branching header

Y-shape branching joint

T shape branching joint

Flow selector unit

7) Connecting pipe size of cooling only indoor unit

Gas side

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø15.9

Ø22.2

Liquid side

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Capacity rank of indoor unit

15m or less above 15m

007 to 012 Type

15m or less above 15m

015 to 018 Type

024 to 056 Type

072, 096 Type

∗ 2 pipes for cooling only indoor unit shall be used with liquid pipe and suction gas pipe.

8, 9) Selection of branching joint/header

Total capacity codes of indoor units



Model name

For 3 piping For 2 piping

j k

Y-Shape branching joint *1 *2

Branching

Header

*1, *2, *3

For 4

Branching

For 8

Branching

T-Shape branching joint (For connecting outdoor unit)

Below 18.0

18.0 to below 40.0

40.0 to below 70.5

70.5 or more

Below 40.0

40.0 to below 70.5

Below 6.4

6.4 to below 14.2

14.2 to below 25.2

25.2 or more

Below 14.2

14.2 to below 25.2

Below 40.0

40.0 to below 70.5

Below 14.2

14.2 to below 25.2

1 set of 4 types of T-shape joint pipes as described below : The rewired quantity is arranged and combined at the site.

- Balance pipe (Ø 9.52) X 1

- Piping at liquid side (Ø 12.7 to Ø 22.2) X 1

- Piping at discharge gas side (Ø 19.1 to Ø 28.6) X 1

- Piping at suction gas side (Ø 22.2 to Ø 38.1) X 1

RBM-BY53FE

RBM-BY103FE

RBM-BY53E

RBM-BY103E

RBM-BY203FE

RBM-BY303FE

RBM-BY203E

RBM-BY303E

RBM-HY1043FE RBM-HY1043E




RBM-BT13FE

∗1 Branching pipe on the 1st branch should be selected according to the capacity code for outdoor unit.

∗2 In case total capacity code for indoor units shall be exceeded to capacity code for outdoor unit, the pipe size should be selected with capacity code for outdoor unit.

∗3 For 1 line after header branching, indoor units with a maximum of 6.0 capacity code in total can be connected.

10) Selection of flow selector unit

Model name

RBM-Y1122FE

RBM-Y1802FE

RBM-Y2802FE

Total capacity rank of connectable indoor unit

below 11.2 kW

11.2 to below 18.0kW

18.0 below 28.0kW or less

∗ Confirm also Installation Manual of flow selector unit.

Max. No. of connected indoor units

5

8

8

Follower Unit

C

Follower Unit

B

Header Unit

A

Outdoor unit

1

Balance pipe

1 Outdoor unit connecting piping

1

2 3 Main piping

9 T-shape

Main connecting piping branching joint between outdoor units

8


4 Liquid pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

4

8 Y-Shape branching joint

4

8 Y-Shape branching joint

10

5

FS unit

6

5

6

Liquid pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

8

4

8

10

5

FS unit

6

Indoor unit

4

5

6

8

5

6

7 7

4

< Cooling only > < Cooling only >

4

4

5

6 6 6

Group control

6

13

5-4. Allowable Length/Height Difference of Refrigerant Piping

Height difference between outdoor units

H3 5m

Header Unit

A

Follower Unit

B

Outdoor Unit

Follower Unit

C

Note:

In case of connecting method <Ex.2>, a large amount of refrigerant and refrigerant oil may return to the head unit. Therefore, set the T-shape joint so that oil does not enter directly.

<Ex.1>

Header Unit Follower Unit Follower Unit

A B C

T-shape branching

Main piping

La Lb Lc

LA

Main connecting piping between outdoor units

Length corresponded to farthest piping between outdoor units LO 25m

L1

<Ex.2>

Header Unit Follower Unit Follower Unit

A B C

Branching piping

L2

Branching header

Connecting piping of indoor unit

L9

Height difference between outdoor and indoor units

H1 50m


L3 a b c g h

Indoor unit

i

FS unit

j k

< Cooling only > < Cooling only >

Equivalent length corresponded to farthest piping L 150m

Equivalent length corresponded to farthest piping after 1st branching Li 50m

Lj

L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 d

FS unit

l

Indoor unit

m e n

FS unit

f

Lh o

(Header)

p q

(q)

Height difference between indoor units

H2 35m

(Upper outdoor unit)

Height difference between indoor units in group control by

one FS unit

H4 0.5 m

* Allowable length and height difference of refrigerant piping

Total extension of pipe (Liquid pipe, real length)

Allowable value

300 m

Piping section

LA+La+Lb+Lc+L1+L2+L3+L4+L5+L6+L7+L8+9

+a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q

Farthest piping length L (

*

1)

Real length

Equivalent length

Max. equivalent length of main piping

Equivalent length of farthest piping from 1st branching Li (

*

1)

Max. real length of indoor unit connecting piping

Pipe

Length

Max. real length between FS unit and indoor unit (

*

2)

Max. Equivalent length of outdoor unit connecting piping LO (

*

1)

Max. real length of outdoor unit connecting piping

Max. equivalent length between FS unit and indoor unit Lj

Max. real length between FS unit and header indoor unit Lh (

*

2)

Height between indoor

Upper outdoor unit and outdoor units H1

Lower outdoor unit

Height

Difference

Height between indoor units H2

Height between outdoor units H3

Upper outdoor unit

Lower outdoor unit

125 m

150 m

85 m

50 m

30 m

15 m

25 m

10 m

30 m

LA+Lc+L1+L3+L4+L5+L6+L7+L8+q

L1

L3+L4+L5+L6+L7+L8+q a+g, b+h, c+i, d+l, e+m, f+n, j, k g, h, i, l, m, n, L7+o, L7+L8+p, L7+L8+q

LA+Lc (LA+Lb)

La, Lb, Lc

L7+L8+q, L7+L8+p

L7+o 15 m

50 m

30 m

35 m

15 m

5 m

——

——

——

——

——

Height difference between indoor units in group control by one FS unit H4

0.5 m ——

*

1 : The farthest outdoor unit from 1st branch to be named C, and farthest indoor unit from 1st branch to be named (q).

*

2 : Attached connection cable can be used up to 5 m in pipe length between indoor and FS unit. When the pipe length between indoor and FS unit exceeds 5 m, be sure to use the connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE).

* System restrictions

Note 1) Combination of outdoor units : Header unit (1 unit) +

Follower unit (0 to 2 units). Header unit is outdoor unit nearest to the connected indoor units

Max. No. of combined outdoor units

Max. capacity of combined outdoor units

Max. No. of connected indoor units

Max. capacity of combined indoor units

*

3 units

84.0 kW

H2

48 units

H2 15m

>

15m

135% (*1)

105%

1 : MMY-MAP1201HT8 : UP to 120 %

Note 2) Install the outdoor units in order of capacity.

(Header unit Follower unit 1 Follower unit 2)

Note 3) Refer to outdoor unit combination table in page.6.

Note 4) Piping to indoor units shall be perpendicular to piping to the head outdoor unit as <Ex.1>.

Do not connect piping to indoor units in the same direction of head outdoor unit as <Ex.2>.

14

• Brazed couplings and special branches

• Use suitable parts for typical elbow couplings and socket couplings.

(Consider the size, material, thickness, etc.)

• Special branches

Use deoxidized parts sold separately.

Branching at outdoor unit side

T-shape branching joint

RBM-BT13FE

Branching joint

RBM-BY53E

RBM-BY103E

RBM-BY203E

RBM-BY303E

RBM-BY53FE

RBM-BY103FE

RBM-BY203FE

RBM-BY303FE

Branching at indoor unit side

Branch header

4 branching 8 branching

RBM-HY1043E

RBM-HY2043E

RBM-HY1043FE

RBM-HY2043FE

RBM-HY1083E

RBM-HY2083E

RBM-HY1083FE

RBM-HY2083FE

• Solder

Because only “copper-to-copper” connections are made in the multi type air conditioning system, use the hard solder “phosphor copper solder.”

15

5-5. Careful Handling

Careful handling is the most important step in preventing moisture, dirt, and dust from getting inside of the pipes.

Moisture in pipes has caused major problems in numerous instances in the past. Therefore, it is important to be as careful as possible in order to prevent problems before they occur.

Pipe delivery and storage

When pipes are delivered, care should be taken to prevent it from becoming bent or deformed, and the ends of the pipes should be capped in order to prevent dirt, mud, rain, etc., from getting inside. Build a wooden frame to hold the pipes securely, and store the pipes in the specified location.

Delivery of copper pipes without caps to a work site is not acceptable.

Frame for careful handling and to prevent rolling

Careful handling on a pallet

Cap

Pipe caps

The ends of all pipes must be sealed. The most reliable method is the “pinch method,” but the taping method can be selected in some circumstances.

Location

Outdoors

Indoors

Time for installation

One month or more

Less than one month

Does not matter

Careful handling method

Pinch method

Pinch or taping method

Pinch or taping method

Copper pipe

Pinch the end of the copper pipe closed, and braze any opening closed.

Solder

Braze here

Cover the end of the copper pipe with vinyl tape.

[Taping method]

Opening

Vinyl tape

Flatten

Fold over

Tape again

Copper pipe

16

CAUTIONS

GOOD

1) Do not allow dirt or moisture inside of the pipes.

• Keep the open ends of all pipes capped until all pipes have been connected.

• Pipe openings should face horizontally or downwards if at all possible.

2) When passing a pipe through an

opening in a wall, always keep the end of the pipe capped.

Cap

3) Do not place pipes directly on the ground. Do not scrape pipes on the ground.

4) When deflashing (removing burrs from) a pipe, point the opening downwards so that no scraps fall inside of the pipe.

Wall

Cap or plastic bag

Rubber band

Rubber band

Cap or plastic bag

Do not allow pipe to touch ground

Ground

Pipe

Burrs

Deflasher

NOT GOOD

Dirt and moisture get inside

Pipe

Wall

Particles of the wall get inside the pipe

Dirt gets inside of pipe

Ground

5) When installing pipes on a rainy day, always keep the ends of the pipes capped.

Rain

Cap or plastic bag

Rubber band

Scraps get inside of pipe

Rain

Rain gets inside of pipe

17

( ) side

Gas diameter of the connected pipe cket side

Liquid

So

Branching Header

18

( )

Branching Joint

diameter of the connected pipe

Gas side cket So

Liquid side

ing Header Branch

( ) diameter of the connected pipe diameter of soc

19

Branching Joint

( ) diameter of the connected pipe external diameter of socket

5-7. Branching Kit Connection Method

[1] Branch joint

<Suction gas/Discharge gas side>

Pipe in use on the site

Socket

Socket

Outlet (2)


To other branching pipe or indoor unit

NOTE :

Install the branch pipes horizontally or vertically so that they branch evenly.

Install the branching joint within ± 15 degrees.

Inlet

To outdoor unit

Outlet (1)

Socket

Gas side branch joint

<Liquid side>


Inlet

To outdoor unit

Socket

Socket

Outlet (1)

Outlet (2)

To other branching pipe or indoor unit


Socket

Gas/Liquid side branch joint

• Installation direction of branch pipe

Install the branching pipes so that it branch either vertically or horizontally.

Heat insulating for pipes

(Branching Joint)

• In order to prevent dripping at the place where the insulation provided with the branching kit meets the insulating material obtained on the site, butt the two types of insulation up against each other, and then wrap the seam between the two types of insulation in at least 10mm of the insulating material (in use on the site).

<Suction gas/Discharge gas/Liquid side>

Butt together

Heat insulator for piping

(in use on the site) in package

Butt together

Heat insulator

Heat insulator for piping

(in use on the site)

Both directions are possible.

150

Branching joint

Heat insulator (in use on the site) by 10mm or more thickness.

Butt together

In case of vertical installation

<Suction gas/Discharge gas/Liquid side>

• On the gas-side pipe, use insulation that can withstand heat of 120°C or higher. For the branch pipe, either use a commercially available coupling cover (for T-shape) that is at least 10mm thick, or else insulate the pipe as shown in the figure at below.

• After applying insulation as outlined above, tape the insulation in place.

A

B

Taping (in use on the site)

(Horizontal line)

Within

± 15 degrees

(A view)

(Horizontal line)

(B view)

<In case of horizontal installation>

Within

± 15 degrees

NOTE :

• Install the branch pipes horizontally or vertically so that they are branched evenly.

• Install the branching joint within ±15 degrees.

Heat insulator

Heat insulator



20

[2] Branch header

<Suction gas/Discharge gas side>

Branching Header

Select and install the socket that matches the diameter of a pipe to be connected to the indoor unit.

<Suction gas/Discharge gas side branch header>

Socket



(Horizontal line)

(Horizontal line)

<Liquid-side>

(A view)

(B view)

Within

± 15 degrees

Within

± 10 degrees

To indoor unit

To outdoor unit

Socket

<Liquid-side branch header>

Socket

Pipe in use on the site Pipe in use on the site

To indoor unit

To outdoor unit

Socket

• If the number of indoor units to be connected is fewer than the maximum number of units that can be connected to the branch header, attach a sealed pipe to the unused connectors.

<Suction gas/Discharge gas side branch header>

Outlet sealed pipe

(Provided with

branch header)

B

A

<Liquid-side branch header>

(Horizontal line)

NOT GOOD

(C view)

Within

± 15 degrees

When arranging the branching header at the liquid side, attach a header sealed pipe on the sealing side of the header as shown in the fiqure at below.

Be sure to install the branch pipe downward.

Horizontal viewed from D point should be within ± 10 degrees same as view B.

• Supporting branching header

After applying the insulation, set the hanging metals as support. (in use on the site).

NOTE :

1. Install the branching header so that it branches horizontally. It cannot be used in a vertical position.

2. Do not use T-type pipe for the branching section.

Inlet socket

Branching Header Header sealed pipe

Within

± 10 degrees


(D view) Sealing side Outlet sealed pipe

(Provided with

branch header)

C

D

• Install the branch header so that it branches horizontally. It cannot be used in a vertical position.

CAUTION

1. On the inlet side of a Y-type branch joint or branch header, allow for at least 300mm of straight pipe.

2. A Y-type branch joint can be installed so that it branches either vertically or horizontally; if branching horizontally, it should be within an angle of ± 15°.

3. A branch header should be installed so that it branches horizontally.

4. Do not use T-type branch joints.

CAUTION

In the multi air conditioning system, because the refrigerant pipes congregate at the rooftop pipeshaft outlet in the vertical pipeshaft, it is necessary to attach “labels” to each pipe in order to make clear to which system a given pipe belongs so as to prevent pipes from being connected incorrectly.

21

How to connect “Cooling Only” indoor unit

Branch joint

• When connecting a Cooling Only indoor unit, attach a sealed pipe to the unused connectors of the branching pipe of discharge gas side.

Connect sealed pipe.

Indoor unit

Cooling only

Suction gas side

* Discharge gas side

Liquid side

Flow selector unit

Indoor unit

Heating and Cooling

∗ Refer to above. There is the method of connecting without using branching joint pipe of discharge gas side.

For details, refer to the Installation Manual of the Air Conditioner.

Branch header

• When connecting a Cooling Only indoor unit, attach a sealed pipe to the unused connectors of the branching pipe of discharge gas side.

Suction gas side

Discharge gas side

Liquid side

Connect sealed pipe.

Indoor unit

Cooling only

Flow selector unit

Indoor unit

Heating and Cooling

[NOTE]

For cooling only indoor unit in Super-HRM system, item code (DN) setting from the wired remote controller is necessary. (Refer to the section “13-1.”)

22

[3] T-shape branching joint (For connection of outdoor unit)

RBM-BT13FE

Please read "Safety Cautions" described in the

Installation Manual of the Air Conditioner.

• Check the following parts in the package.

• For piping material and size of the refrigerant pipes, refer to the Installation Manual of the Air

Conditioner.

Parts

NOTE :

All dimentions are in millimeters.

In the following tables, ( ) indicates diameter of the indicated position, and others indicate diameter of the connected pipe.

RBM-BT13E (T-shape branching joint)

Socket

Suction

Gas side


Liquid side

For balancing pipe

Branching joint

Ø38.1

Ø38.1

Ø38.1

1 pc

Ø28.6

Ø28.6

Ø28.6

1 pc

Ø22.2

Ø22.2

Ø22.2

1 pc

Ø9.5

Ø9.5

Ø9.5

1 pc

Diameter of the connected pipe

(external diameter

of soket)

No.

61

71

73

Diameter

Ø34.9 x (Ø38.1) 1pc

Ø28.6 x (Ø38.1) 3pcs

Ø22.2 x (Ø38.1) 2pcs

20

43

Ø19.1 x (Ø28.6) 2pcs

Ø22.2 x (Ø28.6) 2pcs

14

18

85

Ø15.9 x (Ø22.2) 1pc

Ø19.1 x (Ø22.2) 1pc

Ø12.7 x (Ø22.2) 2pcs

<Branching pipe for balancing pipe>

To outdoor unit


To other branching pipe or outdoor unit



Branching pipe for balancing pipe (Provided)


• When combining two units,

connect directly between

outdoor units.

Header unit Follower unit

<Heat insulating for pipe (In use of the site)>

• Be sure to perform heat insulating at liquid side and gas side, and balancing pipes separately.

(Heat insulator for balancing is not provided.)

• Use heat-resisting heat insulator (120°C or more) for pipes at gas side.

• To insulate heat of the branching pipes, use a joint cover (For T-shape) available on the market that is with 10mm or more thickness, or one applied with machining as shown in the figure.

• Seal the branching piping completely without clearance to prevent dewing or falling of water drops.

Heat insulating pipe for piping

Seal with vinyl tape

90 degrees

Seal the joint with urethane foaming agent, etc.

Heat insulating pipe for piping

Connect balancing pipe directly.

ØD

Cut the heat insulator at the right angle

ØD

Heat insulator

90 degrees

Cut the heat insulator at the right angle rees

90 deg more then 100mm

23

<Branching pipes at suction gas side/discharge gas side/liquid side>


Socket at suction gas/ discharge gas/liquid side

(Provided)

To other branching pipe or branching section of main pipe

To outdoor unit



Socket at suction gas/discharge gas/liquid side (Provided)

Branching pipe at suction gas/discharge gas/liquid side (Provided)

Socket at suction gas/discharge gas/liquid side (Provided)


*

Use the attached socket at suction gas/ discharge gas/liquid sides along with the selected pipe size.

(Figure shows a connecting example.)

To other branching pipe or branching section of main pipe

To outdoor unit


• Installation of branching pipes to suction gas/discharge gas/liquid sides.

Header outdoor unit

Follower outdoor unit

GOOD

NOT GOOD

Header outdoor unit

Follower outdoor unit

Do not install branch pipe in this direction

24

5-8. External Dimensions of Branch Connectors

(Outline drawings are shown on the following pages.)

Branching joints and headers

Y-shape branching joint (*3)

4-branching header (*4) (*5)

8-branching header (*4) (*5)

Model name

RBM-BY53FE

RBM-BY103FE

RBM-BY203FE

RBM-BY303FE

RBM-BY53E

RBM-BY103E

RBM-BY203E

RBM-BY303E

RBM-HY1043FE

RBM-HY2043FE

RBM-HY1043E

RBM-HY2043E

RBM-HY1083FE

RBM-HY2083FE

RBM-HY1083E

RBM-HY2083E

T-shape branching joint (For connection of outdoor units)

RBM-BT13FE

Usage

Indoor unit capacity code (*1) : Total below 6.4

Indoor unit capacity code (*1) : Total 6.4 or more and below 14.2


Indoor unit capacity code (*1) : Total 25.2 or more




Indoor unit capacity code (*1) : Total 25.2 or more









1 set 4 types T-shape joint pipes as described below:

The required quantity is arranged and they are combined on site.

Connection piping

Balance pipe

Piping at liquid side

Piping at discharge gas side

Piping at suction gas side

Corresponded dia. (mm) Q'ty

Ø 9.5

1

Ø12.7 to Ø22.2

Ø19.1 to Ø28.6

Ø22.2 to Ø38.1

1

1

1

For 3 piping

For 2 piping (*6)

For 3 piping

For 2 piping (*6)

For 3 piping

For 2 piping (*6)

Appearance

*

1

“

Capacity code

”

can be obtained from page 6. (Capacity code is not actual capacity.)

*

2 If total capacity code value of indoor unit exceeds that of outdoor unit, apply capacity code of outdoor unit.

*

3 When using Y-shape branching joint for 1st branching, select according to capacity code of outdoor unit.

*

4 Max. 6.0 capacity code in total can be connected.

*

*

5 If the capacity code of outdoor unit is 26 or more, it is not used for 1st branching.

6 This is used for branching to

“ cooling only

”

indoor unit.

*

7 Model names for outdoor and indoor units described in this guide are shortened because of the space constraint.

5-9. Nitrogen Gas Blow Method (During Brazing)

• If nitrogen gas is not passed through the pipes during brazing, a film of oxidized material will form on the inner surfaces of the pipes. The presence of a such a film in the system will adversely affect the operation of the valves and compressor in the refrigerant system, and will prevent the system from operating normally.

• In order to prevent this from occurring, nitrogen gas is passed through the pipes while brazing is in progress.

This process of replacing the air in the pipes with nitrogen is called the “nitrogen gas blow.”

This is the basic method that is used for brazing work.

CAUTION

1. Nitrogen gas must be used. (Oxygen, carbon dioxide, and fluorocarbons cannot be used.)

2. Always be sure to use a pressure-reducing valve.

Outside

Valve

Reducing valve

Piping at site

Copper pipe Ø6.4

Piping

Reducing valve

Hose

Brazing position

Taping

Valve

Pressure tight hose

Nitrogen gas bomb

25

Nitrogen gas bomb

5-10. Brazing Work

1. Brazing work should be performed downwards or sideways. Avoid brazing upwards (in order to avoid incomplete brazing). (Recommendation)

2. Always used the specified piping materials for liquid pipes and gas pipes, and make sure that they are installed in the proper direction and at the proper angle.

3. The “nitrogen gas blow” method should be used when brazing.

GOOD

(Recommended brazing)

NOT GOOD

Brazing material

Lateral direction

Brazing material

(Direction downward)

Brazing material

(Direction upward)

CAUTIONS

1. Pay attention to fire prevention concerns. (Take preventative measures in the area where brazing work is to be performed, such as keeping a fire extinguisher or water handy.)

2. Be careful not to burn yourself.

3. Make sure that any gaps between pipes and couplings are appropriate. (Do not miss brazing any joints.)

4. Make sure that pipes are adequately supported.

• The following table provides basic guidelines for the interval between supports for horizontal copper pipe.

Coupling size of brazed pipe

Connected section

External size Internal size

K

G

Interval between supports for copper pipe

Nominal dia.

Max. interval (m)

20 or less

1.0

25 to 40

1.5

• Avoid securing copper pipes with metal brackets directly.

(Unit: mm)

Standard outer dia. of connected copper pipe

6.35

9.52

12.70

15.88

19.05

22.22

28.58

34.92

Connected section

External size Internal size

Standard outer dia. (Allowable difference)

C

6.35 (±0.03)

F

Min. depth of insertion

K

7

G

6

9.52 (±0.03)

12.70 (±0.03)

15.88 (±0.03)

19.05 (±0.03)

22.22 (±0.03)

28.58 (±0.04)

34.90 (±0.04)

+0.04

9.62 ( )

+0.04

12.81 ( )

+0.04

16.00 ( )

+0.03

19.19 ( )

+0.03

22.36 ( )

+0.06

28.75 ( )

+0.04

35.11 ( )

8

9

9

11

11

13

14

7

8

8

10

10

12

13

Oval value

0.06 or less

0.08 or less

0.10 or less

0.13 or less

0.15 or less

0.16 or less

0.20 or less

0.25 or less

Min. thickness of coupling

0.50

0.60

0.70

0.80

0.80

0.82

1.00

1.20

∗ Gas brazing of refrigerant pipes must be performed by personnel qualified to do so under local ordinances.

Minmum wall thickness for R410A application

Soft (Coil)

OK

OK

OK

OK

NG

NG

NG

NG

Hard or Half hard

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OD (Inch)

1/4

3/8

1/2

5/8

3/4

7/8

1.1/8

1.3/8

OD (mm)

6.35

9.52

12.70

15.88

19.05

22.20

28.58

34.92

Minium wall thickness

0.80

0.80

0.80

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.10

26

5-11. Flare Processing

Flare processing procedure

Parts and material : Copper pipe, flare nut. Flare nut shallbe of attached on the indoor unit or R410A exclusive.

Tools : Flare tool (“Rigid” type), reamer, pipe cutter

Work procedure

Straighten the coiled copper pipe.

Key point

Uncoil the pipe.

(Reason)

• It is difficult to cut the coiled pipe correctly, which increases the chance of failure.

Cut the pipe with the pipe cutter.

1. Position the blade of the cutter so that it will cut the pipe at a perpendicular angle.

2. Rotate the pipe cutter to the left to cut the pipe.

3. Move the pipe cutter slowly.

• The cut surface will be at an angle.

• The cutter will bite too tightly.

• The copper pipe will be deformed.

Use the reamer to remove burrs from the cut surface of the pipe.

Pipe

Burr

Deburring

1 . Keep the opening of the pipe facing downwards.

2. Be careful not to scratch the inner surface of the pipe.

• Scraps will get inside of the pipe.

• A gas leak could result.

Clear out the inside of the pipe by tapping on the end with a screwdriver.

Make sure that all scraps of metal are out of the tube by lightly tapping on the tube while the opening is pointing down.

• Metal scraps in the tube can damage the compressor.

• If the scraps adhere to the flared region, a gas leak may result.

Insert the flare nut.

Be certain to insert the flare nut before beginning the flare process.

• The flare nut will not fit inside the copper pipe after the flare process.

27

Work procedure

Attach the (“Rigid”) flare tool to the copper pipe.

Align the punch.

(Align the arrow with the line adjacent to the next hole.)

Key point

1. Make sure that the inner surfaces of the flare tool are clean.

2. Determine the dimensions of the copper pipe in accordance with the flare tool.

45˚

Flare tool

• Projection margin in flaring : A (Unit : mm)

Rigid (Clutch type)

Outer dia. of copper pipe

6.4

9.5

12.7

15.9

R410A tool used

R410A R22

0 to 0.5

(Same as left)

0 to 0.5

(Same as left)

0 to 0.5

(Same as left)

0 to 0.5

(Same as left)

Conventional tool used

R410A

1.0 to 1.5

R22

0.5 to 1.0

1.0 to 1.5

1.0 to 1.5

1.0 to 1.5

0.5 to 1.0

0.5 to 1.0

0.5 to 1.0

Copper pipe

(Reason)

• The copper pipe will slip out while the flaring process is in progress.

• The flared dimensions vary.

Dimensions to end of copper tube when flared with one tool surface

Align the arrow on the punch with the prescribed position on the flare tool.

Imperial (Wing nut type)


6.4

9.5

12.7

15.9

R410A

1.5 to 2.0

1.5 to 2.0

2.0 to 2.5

2.0 to 2.5

R22

1.0 to 1.5

1.0 to 1.5

1.5 to 2.0

1.5 to 2.0

• If the “A” dimension is small, the flared contact surface is smaller and a gas leak becomes more likely.

Flare the pipe.

Remove the flare tool and check the flared surface.

Slowly and carefully turn the flare tool handle while it clicks, until it turns freely. Turn the handle to the left and raise it to the top.

• The pipe will not be flared fully.

• The extended portion of the pipe (the cone-shaped portion) will be scratched.

• Extruding margin of copper pipe with flare machining : A (Unit: mm)

A

Copper pipe outer dia.

9.5

12.7

15.9

A

+0 .0

–0.4

13.2

16.6

19.7

If the handle is not raised to the top, the flare tool will scratch the extended portion of the pipe

(the cone-shaped portion).

Check list :

• Is the inner surface of the flared portion equal in width and shiny?

• Is the thickness of the flared portion equal?

• Is the flared portion of a suitable size?

28

5-12. Flushing

The flushing process uses gas pressure to remove foreign matter from the inside of pipes.

Three major effects

(1) Removes oxidation that formed inside of the pipe during brazing as a result of an inadequate “nitrogen gas blow” procedure.

(2) Removes foreign matter and moisture that has gotten inside of pipes due to improper handling.

(3) Checks the connections in the pipe system between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.

[Example work procedure]

1. Install a pressure reducing valve on a nitrogen cylinder. (Fluorocarbon gases and carbon dioxide carry a risk of promoting condensation, while oxygen causes explosion.)

2. Connect the pressure reducing valve to a gauge manifold and then to the gas-side pipe and the liquid-side pipe on the outdoor unit.

N

Indoor unit

2 1

Ø6.4 copper pipe

Diff. size union

V

L

V

H

Gauge manifold valve

Source valve

Reducing valve

Nitrogen gas bomb

3. On the indoor unit side, plug all gas-side pipes except those for the indoor units that are to be flushed.

4. Open the source valve on the nitrogen cylinder and increase the pressure on the secondary side of the pressure reducing valve until it reaches 0.5MPa (5kg/cm 2 G), and then open the valve on the gauge manifold connected to the gas-side pipe.

5. Flushing

Press down on the end of the indoor-side gas pipe with your palm.

Plug (Brass)

Flare nut

Copper pipe

Source valve

1st side

2nd side

0.5MPa

(5kg/cm²G)

When the pressure becomes so great that you can no longer hold it against the end of the pipe, remove your hand from the pipe. (This is the first flush.) Press down against the end with your hand again.

Nitrogen gas

Reducing valve

Flush the pipe a second time.

(When flushing, place a piece of gauze, etc., on the end of the pipe, and then check the gauze for debris or moisture. Repeat the flushing process until nothing more comes out of the pipe.)

6. Close the gauge manifold valve, and repeat the above process for next indoor unit (No. 2 to No. N). Close the gauge manifold valve, open the valve on the gauge manifold that is connected to the liquid-side pipe to allow the nitrogen to flow, and flush that liquid-side pipe.

Hand

Pressure

0.5MPa (5kg/cm²G)

29

5-13. Pipe Connections to the Indoor Unit

1. Once you remove the flare nut from the pipe on the indoor unit (always use a torque wrench), a small amount of gas will escape, but this is simply nitrogen gas with atmospheric pressure that was sealed inside to prevent corrosion, and does not indicate a problem.

<Indoor unit>

Tapered portion

Center

2. Flare the pipe according to the procedure described previously.

Brazing union

(half union)

Flared portion

3. Centering

Center the pipes be seating the tapered portion of the half union in the flared portion of the pipe.

<Pipe>

Flare nut

4. Tightening the flare nut

First hand-tighten the flare nut as much as possible, and then use a torque wrench to tighten the nut completely.

Connecting pipe outer dia.

(mm)

Ø6.4

Tightening torque

(N•m)

14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8 kgf•m)

Ø9.5

34 to 42 (3.4 to 4.2 kgf•m)

Ø12.7

∗

Ø15.9

∗

50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2 kgf•m)

68 to 82 (6.8 to 8.2 kgf•m)

∗ : R410A torque wrench required.

Tightening the flare nut with a torque wrench

<Two spanners>

Turn flare nut with a wrench

<Indoor unit>

Secure half union in place with a wrench

<Pipe>

* Avoid initially tightening the nut with a wrench.

* When tightening a 6.4mm-diameter pipe, tighten the nut lightly with a wrench, and then tighten the nut about 90° to 120° (1.5 to 2 corners of the nut) with a torque wrench.

30

5-14. Pipe Connection to the Outdoor Unit

WARNING

If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation work, ventilate the room.

If the leaked refrigerant gas comes to contact with a fire, the noxious gas may generate.

After installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.

If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room and comes to contact with a fire such as fan heater, stove, or kitchen range, the noxious gas may generate.

Connection of refrigerant pipe

1. The refrigerant pipe connecting section is set in the outdoor unit. Remove the front panel and the piping/wiring panel. (M5: 9 pcs.)

• As shown in the right figure, the hooking hooks are attached at right and left sides each on the front panel.

Lift up and remove the front panel.

2. Pipes can be drawn out forward and downward from the outdoor unit.

3. When drawing out the pipe forward, draw out the pipe to outside via piping/wiring panel, and keep space of

500mm or more from the main pipe connecting the outdoor unit with the indoor unit, considering service work, etc. (For replacing the compressor, 500mm or more space is required.)

4. When drawing out the pipe downward, remove the knockout of the base plate of the outdoor unit, apply the pipe to outside of the outdoor unit, and perform piping at right/left or rear side. Leading pipe of the balancing should be within 4m.

Hook

Packed valve at suction gas side

Front panel

Piping/wiring panel

Packed valve at liquid side

(Left piping)

Drawing out forward

(Right piping)

(Left piping)

Drawing out downward

(Rear piping)

(Right piping)

Packed valve at balance side

(It is not used in this model.)

Ball valve at discharge gas side

REQUIREMENT

For brazing, be sure to use nitrogen gas to avoid oxidation of pipe inside.

1. In a welding work for the refrigerant pipes, be sure to use the nitrogen gas in order to prevent oxidation inside of the pipes; otherwise clogging of the refrigerating cycle due to oxidized scale generates.

2. Use clean and new pipes for the refrigerant pipes and perform piping work so that water or dust is not mixed.

3. Be sure to use a double spanner to loosen or tighten the flare nut. If a single spanner is used, a required tightening cannot be obtained.

Tighten the flare not with the specified torque.


12.7 mm

15.9 mm

Tightening torque (N•m)

50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2 kgf-m)

68 to 82 (6.8 to 8.2 kgf-m)

31

Pipe connecting method of valve (Example)

Using the attached pipes as shown in the following figure, braze elbows, sockets, and pipes which are procured locally.

MMY-

MAP0802FT8

MAP1002FT8

MAP1202FT8

Liquid pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

Drawing out forward

Use the attached pipe for connection.

Use the attached pipe (L-shape) and connect it with socket.

Cut L-shape pipe and connect it with elbow, attached pipe and socket.

Suction gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Attached pipe

Socket

Pipe

Suction gas pipe

L-shape pipe

Attached pipe

Pipe

Attached pipe

Socket

Pipe

Cut

Drawing out downward

Pipe connection at the local site

(Bend rightward slightly.)

Use the attached pipe (Straight pipe) and connect it with socket.

Cut L-shape pipe and connect it with attached pipe and socket.

Suction gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Attached pipe

Pipe

Socket

Pipe

Suction gas pipe

Cut

L-shape pipe

Attached pipe

Socket

Pipe

Use the attached pipe for connection.

Use the attached pipe and connect it with socket.

Cut L-shape pipe and connect it with attached pipe.

Suction gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Attached pipe

Socket

Pipe

Suction gas pipe

L-shape pipe

Attached pipe

Pipe

Pipe

Cut

Pipe connection at the local site

(Bend rightward slightly.)

Use the attached pipe (Straight pipe) and connect it with socket.

Cut L-shape pipe and connect it with attached pipe and socket.

Suction gas pipe

Suction gas pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Attached pipe

Pipe

Socket

Pipe

Cut

L-shape pipe

Attached pipe

Socket

Pipe

32

5-15. Leak Test

A leak test must be performed when connecting pipes to the refrigerant pipes in use at a site.

[1] Leak test pressure

For Super HRM air conditioner systems: 3.73MPa (38kg/cm 2 G)

[2] Test method

After the refrigerant piping has finished, execute an airtight test. For an airtight test, connect a nitrogen gas bomb as shown in the figure below, and apply pressure.

• Be sure to apply pressure from the service ports of the packed valves (or ball valves) at liquid side, discharge gas side, suction gas side, and balance pipe side.

• An airtight test can be only performed to the service ports at liquid side, discharge gas side, suction gas side, and balance pipe side of the outdoor unit.

• Close fully valves at liquid side, discharge gas side, suction gas side, and balance pipe side. As there is possibility that nitrogen gas enters in the refrigerant cycle, re-tighten the valve rods before applying pressure.

(Re-tightening of the valve rods are unnecessary for valves at discharge gas side because they are ball valves.)

• For each refrigerant line, apply pressure gradually with steps at liquid side, discharge gas side, suction gas side, and balance pipe side.

Be sure to apply pressure to suction gas side, discharge gas side, liquid side, and balance pipe side.

REQUIREMENT

Never use “Oxygen”, “Flammable gas” and “Noxious gas” in an airtight test.

Detailed drawing of packed valve

Suction gas side service port

To gauge manifold

Suction gas side packed valve

Discharge gas side service port

Discharge gas side ball valve

To outdoor unit

Liquid side service port

To outdoor unit

Piping at site

Piping at site

Connected to indoor unit

Main pipe

Packed valve fully closed

(Suction gas side)

Outdoor unit

Brazed

Fully closed

Service port

Ø6.4

Copper pipe

Service port

Liquid side packed valve

Piping at site

To outdoor unit

Balance side packed valve

Balance side service port

Fully closed

Ball valve fully closed

(Discharge gas side)

Service port

Fully closed


(Liquid side)

Lowpressure gauge

Highpressure gauge

V

L

V

H

Gauge manifold

Reducing valve

Ø6.4

Copper pipe

Nitrogen gas

Piping at site

To outdoor unit

Service port


(Balance side)

Connected to other follower units

STEP 1 : Apply pressure 0.3MPa (3.0kg/cm 2 G) for 3 minutes or more.



STEP 2 : Apply pressure 1.5MPa (15kg/cm 2 G) for 3 minutes or more.



Available to detect a gross leakage

STEP 3 : Apply pressure 3.73MPa (38kg/cm

2

G) for approx. 24 hours.

Available to detect slow leakage

• Check pressure down.

No pressure down: Accepted Pressure down: Check the leaked position.





However, if there is difference of ambient temp. between when pressure has been applied and when

24 hours passed, pressure changes by approx. 0.01MPa (0.1kg/cm²G) per 1°C. Correct the pressure.





Leaked position check

When a pressure-down is detected in STEP 1, STEP 2, or STEP 3, check the leakage at the connecting points.

Check leakage with hearing sense, feeler, foaming agent, etc, and perform re-brazing or re-tightening of flare if leakage is detected.

33

NOTES

If piping is long, an airtight test is performed for each divided block.

1) Indoor side + vertical pipe

2) Indoor side + vertical pipe + outdoor side

[3] Air purge

For the air purge at installation time (Discharge of air in connecting pipes), use “Vacuum pump method” from viewpoint of protection of earth environment.

• For protection of earth environment, do not discharge the flon gas in the air.

• Using a vacuum pump, eliminate the remained air (nitrogen gas, etc.) in the unit. If gas remains, an absence of faculties may be caused.

After the airtight test, discharge nitrogen gas. Then connect the gauge manifold to the service ports at balance, liquid, suction gas, and discharge gas sides, and connect the vacuum pump as shown in the following figure. Be sure to perform vacuuming for balance, liquid, suction gas and discharge gas sides.

• Be sure to perform vacuuming from liquid balance, suction gas, and discharge gas sides.

• Be sure to use a vacuum pump with counter-flow preventive function so that oil in the pump does not back up in the pipe of the air conditioner while the pump stops. (If oil in the vacuum pump enters in the air conditioner with

R410A refrigerant, a trouble is caused in the refrigerating cycle.)

Connected to indoor unit

Detailed drawing of packed valve

Suction gas side service port

To gauge manifold

Suction gas side packed valve

Discharge gas side service port

Discharge gas side ball valve

To outdoor unit

Main pipe


(Suction gas side)

Outdoor unit

Brazed

Fully closed

Service port

Ø6.4

Copper pipe

Liquid side service port

To outdoor unit

Piping at site

Piping at site

Service port

Lowpressure gauge

Highpressure gauge

V

L

V

H

Gauge manifold

P

Vacuum pump

Liquid side packed valve

Piping at site

To outdoor unit

Balance side packed valve

Balance side service port

Fully closed

Ball valve fully closed

(Discharge gas side)

Service port

Fully closed


(Liquid side)

Piping at site

To outdoor unit

Service port


(Balance side)

Connected to other follower units

• Use a vacuum pump having a high vacuuming degree (below -755mmHg) and a large exhaust gas amount (over

40L/minute).

• Perform vacuuming for 2 or 3 hours though time differs due to pipe length. In this time, check all packed valves at liquid, suction gas, and discharge gas sides are fully closed.

• If vacuuming valve amount is not decreased to below -755mmHg even after vacuuming for 2 hours or more, continue vacuuming for 1 hour or more. If -755mmHg or less cannot be obtained by 3 hours or more vacuuming, check the leaked position.

• When vacuuming valve reached to -755mmHg or less after vacuuming for 2 hours or more, close valves VL and

VH of the gauge manifold fully, stop the vacuum pump, leave it as it is for 1 hour, and then check the vacuuming degree does not change. If it changed, there may be a leaked position. Check the leaked position.

• After the above procedure of vacuuming has finished, exchange the vacuum pump with a refrigerant cylinder and advance to the additional charging of refrigerant.

34

5-16. Charging Requirement with Additional Refrigerant

After the system has been vacuumed, replace the vacuum pump with a refrigerant cylinder and charge the system with additional refrigerant.

Calculating the amount of additional refrigerant required

Refrigerant in the system when shipped from the factory

R410A

Refrigerant amount charged in factory Heat recovery model

8HP

11.5kg

10HP

11.5kg

12HP

11.5kg

When the system is charged with refrigerant at the factory, the amount of refrigerant needed for the pipes at the site is not included. Calculate the additional amount needed, and add that amount to the system.

(Calculation)

Additional refrigerant charge amount is calculated from size of liquid pipe at site and its real length.

[Additional refrigerant charge amount at site] =

[Real length of liquid pipe] ×

Additional refrigerant charge amount

×

1.3

+ per liquid pipe 1m (Table 1)

Compensation by system HP (Table 2)

Example : Additional charge amount R (kg) = {(L1 x 0.025kg/m) + (L2 x 0.055kg/m) + (L3 x 0.105kg/m)

+ (L4 x 0.160kg/m) + (L5 x 0.250kg/m)} x 1.3

L1 : Real total length of liquid pipe Ø6.4 (m)





System : 24HP

Table 1

Pipe dia. at liquid side

Additional refrigerant amount/1m

Ø6.4

0.025kg

Ø9.5

0.055kg

Ø12.7

0.105kg

Ø15.9

0.160kg

Ø19.1

0.250kg

Ø22.2

0.350kg

Table 2

Combined horse power

(HP)

8

10

24

26

28

12

16

18

20

30

Outdoor combination (HP)

8

10

8

10

10

12

8

10

10

10

8

8

10

8

8

10

10

8

8

8

10

Compensation by system HP

(kg)

2.0

2.5

3.0

-1.5

0.0

2.0

-4.5

-3.0

-1.5

0.0

35

Refrigerant charging

• Keeping valve of the outdoor unit closed, be sure to charge liquid refrigerant from service port at liquid side.

• If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, open fully valves of outdoor unit at liquid, suction gas, and discharge gas sides, perform cooling operation under condition that valve at suction gas side returns to close side a little, and then charge refrigerant into service port at suction gas side. In this time, choke the refrigerant slightly by operating valve of the bomb to charge refrigerant. The liquid refrigerant may be charged suddenly, therefore be sure to charge refrigerant gradually.

• When refrigerant leaks and shortage of refrigerant generates, recover refrigerant in the system and recharge new refrigerant up to the correct level.

<Example of calculation>

MMY-MAP1002FT8

Ø12.7 (10m)

Ø9.5 (10m)

Ø9.5 (4m)

Liquid pipe

Ø12.7 (30m)

FS unit

Ø9.5 (7m) Ø9.5 (7m) Ø6.4 (3m) Ø9.5 (5m) Ø6.4 (5m)

Ø9.5 (3m) Ø9.5 (3m) Ø6.4 (2m) Ø9.5 (5m)

024 024 009 024 009

Indoor unit

<Cooling only>

Liquid pipe :

Ø6.4 = 3 + 2 + 5 = 10m

Ø9.5 = 10 + 4 + 7 + 3 + 7 + 3 + 5 + 5 = 44m

Ø12.7 = 30 + 10 = 40m

Compensation by system HP = 2.5kg (10HP)

R = {(10m x 0.025kg/m) + (44m x 0.055kg/m) + (40m x 0.105kg/m)} × 1.3 + 2.5= 11.43kg

REQUIREMENT

<Entry of refrigerant charge amount>

• Fill the additional refrigerant record column of the wiring diagram indication plate with the additional refrigerant amount at installation work, total refrigerant amount and the name of the service man who charged refrigerant at installation time.

• The total refrigerant amount means the total value of the refrigerant amount at shipment and the additional refrigerant amount at installation time. The refrigerant amount at the shipment is one described on the “Unit nameplate”.

36

Chart of additional refrigerant charging amount

Unit [kg]

28

29

30

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

24

15

16

17

18

19

10

11

12

13

14

Pipe size (Liquid pipe)

Actual piping length (m)

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

1

2

0.025

0.050

0.055

0.110

0.105

0.210

0.160

0.320

0.250

0.500

0.350

0.700

3

4

0.075

0.165

0.315

0.480

0.750

1.050

0.100

0.220

0.420

0.640

1.000

1.400

5

6

7

8

9

0.125

0.150

0.175

0.200

0.225

0.275

0.330

0.385

0.440

0.495

0.525

0.630

0.735

0.840

0.945

0.800

0.960

1.120

1.280

1.440

1.250

1.500

1.750

2.000

2.250

1.750

2.100

2.450

2.800

3.150

0.250

0.275

0.300

0.325

0.350

0.450

0.475

0.550

0.605

0.660

0.715

0.770

0.990

1.045

1.050

1.155

1.260

1.365

1.470

1.890

1.995

1.600

1.760

1.920

2.080

2.240

2.880

3.040

2.500

2.750

3.000

3.250

3.500

4.500

4.750

3.500

3.850

4.200

4.550

4.900

0.375

0.825

1.575

2.400

3.750

5.250

0.400

0.880

1.680

2.560

4.000

5.600

0.425

0.935

1.785

2.720

4.250

5.950

6.300

6.650

0.500

1.100

2.100

3.200

5.000

7.000

0.525

1.155

2.205

3.360

5.250

7.350

0.550

1.210

2.310

3.520

5.500

7.700

0.575

1.265

2.415

3.680

5.750

8.050

0.600

1.320

2.520

3.840

6.000

8.400

0.625

1.375

2.625

4.000

6.250

8.750

0.650

1.430

2.730

4.160

6.500

9.100

0.675

1.485

2.835

4.320

6.750

9.450

0.700

1.540

2.940

4.480

7.000

9.800

0.725

1.595

3.045

4.640

7.250

10.150

0.750

1.650

3.150

4.800

7.500

10.500

58

59

60

55

56

57

50

51

52

53

54

45

46

47

48

49

40

41

42

43

44

Pipe size (Liquid pipe)

Actual piping length (m)

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

31

32

0.775

0.800

1.705

1.760

3.255

3.360

4.960

5.120

7.750

8.000

10.850

11.200

33

34

0.825

1.815

3.465

5.280

8.250

11.550

0.850

1.870

3.570

5.440

8.500

11.900

35

36

37

38

39

0.875

0.900

0.925

0.950

0.975

1.925

1.980

2.035

2.090

2.145

3.675

3.780

3.885

3.990

4.095

5.600

5.760

5.920

6.080

6.240

8.750

9.000

9.250

9.500

9.750

12.250

12.600

12.950

13.300

13.650

1.000

1.025

1.050

1.075

1.100

1.200

1.225

2.200

2.255

2.310

2.365

2.420

2.640

2.695

4.200

4.305

4.410

4.515

4.620

5.040

5.145

6.400

6.560

6.720

6.880

7.040

7.680

7.840

10.000 14.000

10.250 14.350

10.500 14.700

10.750 15.050

11.000 15.400

1.125

2.475

4.725

7.200

11.250 15.750

1.150

2.530

4.830

7.360

11.500 16.100

1.175

2.585

4.935

7.520

11.750 16.450

12.000 16.800

12.250 17.150

1.250

2.750

5.250

8.000

12.500 17.500

1.275

2.805

5.355

8.160

12.750 17.850

1.300

2.860

5.460

8.320

13.000 18.200

1.325

2.915

5.565

8.480

13.250 18.550

1.350

2.970

5.670

8.640

13.500 18.900

1.375

3.025

5.775

8.800

13.750 19.250

1.400

3.080

5.880

8.960

14.000 19.600

1.425

3.135

5.985

9.120

14.250 19.950

1.450

3.190

6.090

9.280

14.500 20.300

1.475

3.245

6.195

9.440

14.750 20.650

1.500

3.300

6.300

9.600

15.000 21.000

37

<Full opening of the valve>

• Open valve of the outdoor unit fully.

• Using 4mm-hexagonal wrench, open fully the valve rods at liquid side.

• Using a spanner, etc, open fully the valve rod of packed valve at suction gas side.

• Using the pinchers, open fully the handle of the ball valve at discharge gas side.

Be careful that handling of ball valve differs from that of packed valve.

How to open the ball valve at discharge gas side

Valve unit

Valve unit

Charge port

Handle

Pull out the handle and using cutting pliers, etc. turn it counterclockwise by 90˚. (Open fully)

Charge port

Flare nut

Push in handle.

Closed completely

Handle

Opened fully

Flare nut

<Heat insulation for pipe>

• Apply heat insulation of pipe separately at liquid, suction gas, and discharge gas sides.

• Be sure to use thermal insulator with heat-resisting temp. 120°C or more.

CAUTION

• After piping connection work has finished, cover the opening of the piping/wiring panel with the piping cover, or fill silicon or putty in space of the pipes.

• In case of drawing-out the pipes downward or sideward direction, also close the openings of the base plate and the side plate.

• Under the opened condition, a trouble may be caused due to entering of water or dust.

In case of using pipe cover In case of using no pipe cover

Piping/wiring panel

Piping/wiring panel

Drawing-out forward

Drawing-out sideward

Close the opening with pipe cover.

Drawing-out downward

Drawing-out sideward

Drawing-out forward

Fill silicon or putty in periphery of the pipes.

Drawing-out downward

38

• Check the additional amount of refrigerant.

<Check list>

Calculate the additional amount of refrigerant from the additional amount of refrigerant (A) by the pipe diameter at liquid side and the pipe length to be connected and multiply the specific number.

Additional amount of refrigerant

=

Real liquid pipe length

×

Additional amount of refrigerant per liquid pipe 1m

×

1.3

+

Compensation by system HP

(A) (C)

Firstly enter the total length for each liquid pipe in the following table, and then calculate the additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length.

<Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length>

Pipe dia at liquid side

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

Ø19.1

Ø22.2

Standard amount of refrigerant kg/m

0.025 ×

0.055 ×

0.105 ×

0.160 ×

0.250 ×

0.350 ×

Total pipe length at each liquid side

=

=

=

=

=

=

Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A)

Next, refer to the following table for compensation by system HP (C).

Additional amount of refrigerant pipe dia at each liquid side kg

Kg

Kg

Kg

Kg

Kg

Kg

Kg

<Additional amount of refrigerant>

Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A)

Compensation by HP (C)

Additional amount of refrigerant ((A) × 1.3) + (C)

Kg

Kg

Kg

<Compensation by system HP>

System Horse power

(HP)

8

10

12

16

18

20

24

26

28

30

Outdoor combination

(HP)

8

10

12

8

10

10

8

10

10

10

8

8

10

8

8

10

10

8

8

8

8

Compensation by system HP

(Kg)

2.0

2.5

3.0

–1.5

0.0

2.0

–4.5

–3.0

–1.5

0.0

39

5-17. Insulation Work

Work procedure

Refrigerant piping work

Heat insulating work

(Except connecting section)

Airtight test

Heat insulating work

(Connecting section)

Material

Use material withstanding sufficiently to temperature of pipe for the heat insulator.

Example : Heat insulating polyethylene foam (Heat insulating 120°C or more)

Insulation guidelines

All insulation work for brazed joints, flared joints, etc., should be performed only after successfully passing the leak test. Suction gas pipes, discharge gas pipes and liquid pipes must be insulated separately in Super HRM air conditioning system.

Examples of Correct Insulation

[Insulating both a gas pipe [Insulating supported and a liquid pipe] sections]

Insulation Insulation

Examples of Incorrect Insulation

•

Gas pipes and liquid pipes [Insulating just a gas pipe] cannot be insulated simultaneously.

Liquid pipe

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Suction gas pipe

Control wires

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Control wires

Finishing tape

Insulation

Suction gas pipe

Copper pipe

Insulation

Suction gas pipe

Insulation

Control wires

Finishing tape

Insulation

Discharge gas pipe

Insulation

Finishing tape

•

Insulate all joints adequately.

This portion is not insulated.

Support bracket

40

CAUTION

(1) Use the insulating material provided to insulate the indoor unit pipe connection (union and flare nut).

Wrap with vinyl tape.

Insulated pipe provided

(Peel off paper to apply.)

Insulation provided

Gas-side pipe

Gas-side pipe

Seal with vinyl tape.

(2) When insulating branch joints, align the insulating material that was provided with the branch kit with the pipe on site and tape the insulation in place.

Tape

Insulation (in use on site)


Where the insulation that is provided with the branch kit meets the insulation that is in use on the site, butt the ends of the insulation together so that there is no gap and install the insulation as illustrated below, and then tape the insulation in place.

Where insulation meets, butt the insulation together with no gap.

150

Branch kit insulation

Pipe insulation in use at site


Thickness: 10mm or more

(3) If it is likely that heat will build up in the ceiling (examples: inside a slate roof, or inside a ceiling with air that is basically outside air), refrigerant pipes should be insulated with 8 to 10 mm of normal insulation, encased in fiberglass insulation

(16 to 20kg/m

3

) that is at least 10mm thick.

Insulating material that is provided for use on pipe connections at the indoor unit.

41

5-18. Reference for Insulation Work

Reference

Sometimes, copper pipe with insulated sheathing is used in order to save labor. The following reference applies to this type of pipe.

• Insulation: 8 to 10mm

<Pair coil>

Insulation

(chemically cross-linked 30x foam polyethylene)

Pair coil

Copper pipe

Outer film

(polyethylene)

(phosphoric-deoxidized seamless copper pipe)

Soft

Hard

Half hard

Hard

Half hard

Copper pipe (mm)

(Outer dia. × thickness)

6.35 × 0.8

9.52 × 0.8

6.35 × 0.8

12.70 × 0.8

6.35 × 0.8

15.88 × 1.0

9.52 × 0.8

15.88 × 1.0

19.05 × 1.0

22.22 × 1.0

28.6 × 1.0

34.9 × 1.1

Coil length

(m)

20

20

20

20

—

—

—

—

Heat insulator (mm) Heat insulator (mm)

Outer dia.

Thickness Outer dia.

Thickness

24

27

24

8

8

8

48

51

20

20

54 20 34

24

37

27

10

8

10

8

37

—

—

—

—

10

—

—

—

—

57

61

64

68

76

20

20

20

20

20

• Insulation: 20mm

Outer film

(polyethylene)

Insulation

(chemically cross-linked

30x foam polyethylene)

Copper pipe

(phosphoric-deoxidized seamless copper pipe)

100

Temperature inside pipe: 5˚C

90

80

70

60

50

40

10mm thickness

20mm thickness

30

20

10

0

10 20 30

Temperature outside of pipe (˚C)

Condensation zone

Safe zone

40

thicknesses of insulation

Insulating material

10mm

20mm

Example use

When pipe is indoors, and a small amount of condensation under certain conditions is acceptable

When pipe is indoors, and even a small amount of condensation is unacceptable

Material

Copper pipe

Insulation

Item

Material

Material

Specifications

Phosphoric-deoxidized seamless copper pipe

Chemically cross-linked 30x foam polyethylene with textured outer covering

Temperature range

–40°C to 120°C (shrinkage: 1%)

42

6. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

WARNING

Install the air conditioner certainly to sufficiently withstand the weight.


Perform a specified installation work to guard against strong wind or earthquake.

An incomplete installation can cause accidents by the units falling and dropping.

REQUIREMENT

Strictly comply with the following rules to prevent damage of the indoor units and human injury.

• Do not put a heavy article on the indoor unit. (Even units are packaged)

• Carry in the indoor unit as it is packaged if possible. If carrying in the indoor unit unpacked by necessity, be sure to use buffering cloth, etc. not to damage the unit.

• To move the indoor unit, hold the hooking metals (4 positions) only.

Do not apply force to the other parts (refrigerant pipe, drain pan, foamed parts, or resin parts, etc.).

• Carry the package by two or more persons, and do not bundle it with PP band at positions other than specified.

6-1. Before Installation

Before starting installation and before unpacking the air conditioner, check the model name. After unpacking the unit, check the standard accessories that are packed in plastic bags together with the unit. Be sure not to throw them away with the box by mistake.

6-2. Standard Accessories

4-way air discharge cassette type

Part name Q’ty Shape

Installation

Manual

2 ——

Use Part name Q’ty Shape

Heat insulator

1

Use

For heat insulating of drain connecting section

Heat insulating pipe

2

Installation pattern

Installation gauge

For confirmation of ceiling

1 —— position

For positioning of ceiling

(united with installation pattern)

Pattern fixing screw

4 M5 x 16 For attaching pattern

Washer

Hose band

Flexible hose

Heat insulator

8

1

1

1

For hanging down unit

For connecting drain pipe

For centering the drain pipe

For sealing the wire connection opening

43

Part name

Installation Manual


MMU-AP0301WH type or lower

MMU-AP0481WH type


Q’ty Shape Use

1 ——

Installation gauge

For heat insulating

2 section

1

2

——


For checking the position of the ceiling openings and the unit

Fan motor connector

Heat insulator

1

Use

1

1

Name

Ceiling panel components (2-way air discharge cassette type)

Ceiling panel Center panel Air filter Screw installing panel Screw installing panel

Shape

(Q'ty)

Usage

(1 set) (1 pc)

• RBC-UW466PG :

Attached to indoor unit

Attached to ceiling

——— ——— dust.

20mm

M5×20 l

(4 pcs)

For fixing ceiling panel

(4 corners)

30mm

M5×30 l

(2 pcs)

For tentative hanging and fixing ceiling panel (Center part)


Part name

Q’ty Q’ty

AP0071YH to

AP0121SH

AP0151SH to

AP0241SH

AP0091SH to

AP0121SH

AP0151SH to

AP0241SH

Shape Usage

Installation

Manual

Connector — 1

For motor speed up when installed to high ceiling

Heat

Insulating pipe

For heat insulating

2 2 section

Banding band

— 10

Used to fix drain piping

Installation gauge

— 4

For drain-up of discharge port


Drain-up pipe

For confirmation of and main unit position


Ceiling panel components (1-way air discharge cassette type)

Ceiling panel

Intake grille

Air filter

Part name

Panel installation screw (M5 x 20)

Screw head insulation

Q’ty

RBC-US135PG, 165PG, 265PG type

1

3

1

7

1 set

Use

———

———

Installs in the intake grille and removes dust and dirt from the air.

For securing the ceiling panel

Prevents condensation from forming on screw heads

44


Installation

Manual

1 ——

Insulated pipe

Concealed duct type


—— Washer 8

Use

For hanging down the unit


Installation

Manual

1 ——

Concealed duct high static pressure type


——

Use

Insulation 1 For insulating the liquid pipe

Insulation 1 For insulating the gas pipe

Under ceiling type


Installation

Manual



1

Use

This manual

(Be sure to hand over to customers)

For confirmation of ceiling

1 — position

Banding band

2 For drain hose forming


Heat insulator

Washer

Hose band

Drain hose

4

2

1

Use

For hanging-down unit

For connecting drain pipe

For drain piping

Heat insulator

1 For sealing of piping hole

High wall type (1series)


Installation

Manual

Heat

Insulating pipe

Wood screw

Ø5.1 x 45

1

12

Use

This manual

(Be sure to hand over customers)

Used to fix installation plate



Screw cap

Bundling band

4

Use

Cover on fixing screw at side plate

Installation plate

Floor standing cabinet type

Use Part name Q’ty Shape Use Part name Q’ty Shape

Installation

Manual

1 ——

Heat insulation

45


Installation

Manual

1 ——

Heat insulation

Drain pan 1

Floor standing concealed type

Use

——

For water draining


Drain receiver fixing screw

1

Use

For fix the drain receiver

Drain hose

Heat insulated pipe

1

For water draining

(Attaches to the drain receiver.)

For insulating the drain

(Attaches to the drain receiver.)

Drain filter 1

Drain filter

(inside the drain receiver)

Attached position Part name

Upper part of main unit Bracket for fixing to wall

Floor standing type

Q’ty Shape

1

Stored position

Installation Manual 1 These sheets

Indoor unit

Thermal insulator 2

Accessory bag

Screw bolt

∗

4 (2)

Thermal insulator

Lower part of main unit Bracket for fixing to floor

2

2

Base for transportation

Using 4 (2) screw bolts, fix to the base.

∗ Quantities in the parentheses are for MMF-AP0361, AP0481 and AP0561 models.

The brackets for fixing to the floor are already mounted to the indoor unit.

Part

No.

Part name (Q'ty)

Part

No.

High Wall type (2 series)


Part

No.


1

Installation plate × 1

2

Wireless remote controller × 1

3

Battery × 2

4

Remote controller holder × 1

5

Mounting screw Ø4 × 25 x 6

6

Pan head wood screw Ø3.1 × 16 × 2

46

6-3. 4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type

Installation space

Secure the specified space in the figure for installation and servicing.

1000 or more 1000 or more

Obstacle

Model MMU-

AP0091H to AP0301H

AP0361H to AP0561H

A mm

271 or more

334 or more

Selection of installation place

In case of continued operation of the indoor unit under high-humidity conditions as described below, dew may condense and water may drop.

Especially, high-humidity atmosphere (dew point temperature : 23°C or more) may generate dew inside the ceiling.

1. Unit is installed inside the ceiling with slated roof.

2. Unit is installed at a location using inside of the ceiling as fresh air take-in path.

3. Kitchen

If installing a unit at such place, put insulating material

(glass wool, etc.) additionally on all the positions of the indoor unit which come to contact with highhumidity atmosphere.

Advice

Set a service check opening panel at right side of the unit (size: 450 x 450mm or more) for piping, maintenance, and servicing.

Ceiling height

Model MMU-

AP0091H to AP0121H

AP0151H to AP0301H

AP0361H to AP0561H

Possible installed ceiling height

Up to 2.7 m

Up to 3.8 m

Up to 4.3 m

When the height of the ceiling exceeds the distance of the item Standard/4-way in Table below, the hot air is difficult to reach the floor. Therefore, it is necessary to change the setup value of the high ceiling switch or discharge direction.

REQUIREMENT

• When using the air conditioner with 2-way discharge system with the standard setting (at a shipment), it may stop abnormally in heating. Therefore, change the setting switch according to the number of discharge direction and the ceiling height.

• When using the air conditioner with 2-way/3-way discharge system, a strong wind blows directly if the ceiling height is lower than the standard. Therefore, change the setting switch according to height of the ceiling.

• When using the high ceiling (1) or (2) with 4-way discharge system, the draft is apt to be felt due to drop of the discharge temperature.

Installable ceiling

(Unit : m)

Model MMU-

No. of discharge direction

Standard (at shipment)

High ceiling (1)

High ceiling (2)

AP0091H to AP0121H

4-way 3-way 2-way

2.7

— 3.0

Cannot be installed to a high ceiling

AP0151H to AP0181H

4-way 3-way 2-way

2.8

3.2

3.5

3.2

3.5

3.8

3.5

3.8

—

AP0241H to AP0301H

4-way 3-way 2-way

3.0

3.3

3.6

3.3

3.5

3.8

3.6

3.8

—

AP0361H to AP0561H

4-way 3-way 2-way

3.6

3.9

4.2

3.9

4.1

4.3

4.2

4.3

—

High ceilong setup

Set data

0000

0001

0003

47

External view

415

Electric parts box

Suction grille (Air suction port)

Air discharge port (4-way)

Z

35˚

381.6

723 hanging bolt pitch

860 to 910 ceiling open dimension

950 panel external dimension

840

480

227

Hanging bolt

For branch duct knockout square hole for Ø150

Round duct (2 positions at right side)

M10 or W3/8 local arrange

Drain discharge port

840

105

250 70

270

Refrigerant pipe connecting port

(Gas) D


(Liquid) C

Bottom face of ceiling

30

360


Model

AP0091H to AP0121H

AP0151H to AP0181H

AP0241H to AP0301H

AP0361H to AP0561H

A

256

319

B

120

C

Ø6.4

D

mm

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

183

Ø9.5

Ø15.9

25

57.5

57

188


Knockout for simple OA

For Ø100

Z view

64

Indoor unit

Stand-up 640 or less

Stand-up 850 or less



(NOTE)

As ABS is used for the drain discharge port of the main unit, the vinyl chloride paste cannot be used.

Use the flexible hose (Band fix) included in the package.

Drain-up standing-up size Space required for installation and servicing

• Wired remote controller (RBC-AMT21E)

4

200

120

16

Check port

( 450)

Check port

( 450)

48

Ceiling opening and installation of hanging bolts

• Considering pipe/wire connecting work inside the ceiling after the indoor unit has been hanged, select an installation place and determine piping direction.

• After installation place of the indoor unit has been determined, open the installation hole on the ceiling and install the hanging bolts.

• For the ceiling opening size and the hanging bolt pitch, refer to the external view and the attached installation pattern.

• If the ceiling has been already set up, draw the drain pipe, refrigerant pipe, indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire, wire for central control system, and remote controller wire up to the position where pipes and wires are to be connected before hanging the indoor unit.

Please procure the hanging bolts and nuts for installation of the indoor unit at local site.

Hanging bolt M10 or W3/8 4 pieces

Nut M10 or W3/8 12 pieces

[How to use the attached installation pattern]

The installation pattern is attached inside of the package cap.

<In case of existing ceiling>

Use the pattern for positioning of the ceiling opening hole and the hanging bolt.

<In case of new ceiling>

Use the pattern for positioning of the opening hole when setting up a new ceiling.

• Install the indoor unit after installation of the hanging bolts.

• Using the attached pattern fixing screws (M5 × 16L: 4 pieces), attach the installation pattern to the indoor unit.

(Screwing to installation brackets of the ceiling panel)

• When setting up the ceiling, open a hole along the outside dimension of the installation pattern.

Indoor unit


(Attached)

M5 × 16L screws (Attached)

These screws are exclusive to the installation pattern. When installing the ceiling panel, the other exclusive screws attached to the ceiling panel

(sold separately) are used.)

Opening a ceiling and installation of hanging bolts

[Treatment of ceiling]

The ceiling differs according to structure of building. For details, consult your constructor or interior finish contractor.

In the process after the ceiling board has been removed, it is important to reinforce ceiling foundation (frame) and to keep horizontal level of installed ceiling correctly in order to prevent vibration of ceiling board.

(1) Cut and remove the ceiling foundation.

(2) Reinforce the cut surface of ceiling foundation, and add ceiling foundation for fixing the end of ceiling board.

[Installation of hanging bolt]

Use M10 hanging bolts (4 pcs, to be local procure).

Matching to the existing structure, set pitch according to size in the unit external view as shown below.

New concrete slab

Install the bolts with insert brackets or anchor bolts.

(Blade type bracket)

(Slide type bracket)

Reinforcing steel

Anchor bolt

(Pipe hanging anchor bolt)

Steel flame structure

Use existing angles or install new support angles.

Hanging bolt

Hanging bolt Support angle

Existing concrete slab

Use a hole-in anchors, hole-in plugs, or a hole-in bolts.

49

Installation of indoor unit

• Attach the nut (M10 or W3/8: Procured locally) and the attached washer (Ø34mm) to the hanging bolt.

• Put washers at up and down of T-groove of the hanging bracket of the indoor unit to hang the indoor unit.

• Using a level vial, check that four sides are horizontal.

(Horizontal degree: Within 5mm)

• Cut off the attached installation gauge from the installation pattern.

• Using the installation gauge, check and adjust clearance between the indoor unit and the ceiling opening hole (1) (10 to 35mm common to four sides) and hanging-down height (2) (12 mm: 4 corners).

(Using direction is printed on the installation gauge.)

Level vial (Horizontal: within 5mm)

Indoor unit

Hanging bolt

Hanging bolt

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

(1)

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

(2)

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

(1) Required those other than M10 flat washer at site.

(2) To prevent falling-off of bolt (safety), be sure to set it just under the hanging bracket as shown in the figure.

Hanging metal

12 to 17 mm (1)

Indoor unit

Installation gauge

10 to 35 mm (2)

Ceiling board

Ceiling board

REQUIREMENT

Before installation of the indoor unit, be sure to remove the cushion for transportation between the fan and the bell mouth. Running the unit without removing the cushion may damage the fan motor.

1) 12 mm

Installation gauge

2) 10 to

35mm

REQUIREMENT

Connect closely the connecting parts between the ceiling panel and the ceiling surface or between the ceiling panel and the indoor unit.

If they are incompletely connected, air leaks resulted in dewing or water leakage.

First, remove the adjust corner caps (4 corners) from the ceiling panel and then install the ceiling panel to the indoor unit.

Be sure to remove the cushion for transportation between the fan and the bell mouth.

Installation of ceiling panel

(Sold separately)

Install the ceiling panel after piping/wiring work has finished.

Install the ceiling panel according to attached

Installation Manual.

Check the installation dimensions of the indoor unit and the ceiling opening are correct, and then install it.

Installation of remote controller


For installation of the wired remote controller, follow the Installation Manual attached with the remote controller.

For installation of the wireless remote controller, follow to the Installation Manual attached to the remote controller.

• Do not put the remote controller on the place where is exposed to direct sunlight or near a stove, etc.

• Operate the remote controller, check the indoor unit surely receives the signal, and then install the remote controller. (Wireless type)

• Install the remote controller 1m apart from the devices such as TV or stereo. (Image may be disturbed or noise may be output.) (Wireless type)

50



Reserve space required to install the indoor unit and for service work.

Keep 5mm or more for clearance between top plate of the indoor unit and the ceiling surface.

<Installation space>

5 mm or more

Model MMU-

AP0071WH type to

AP0301WH type

AP0481WH type

Ceiling depth A mm

398 or more

406 or more

A mm or more

Lower surface of ceiling

1000mm or more

Obstacle

1000mm or more

Ceiling height

Model MMU-

AP0071WH to AP0121WH type


AP0481WH type

Installable ceiling height

Up to 2.7m

Up to 3.0m

Up to 3.5m

1000mm or more

When the ceiling height exceeds 2.7m, the hot air is difficult to reach the floor. In this case, it is necessary to exchange number of rotation of the fan motor by using connector for increase of number of motor rotation which is attached to the air conditioner body.

In case of wireless type

The sensor of indoor unit with wireless remote controller can receive a signal 8m or less. Based upon it, determine a place where the remote controller is operated and the installation place of the indoor unit.

• To prevent a malfunction, select a place where is not influenced by a florescent light or direct sunlight.

• Two or more (Up to 6 units) indoor units with wireless remote controller can be installed in the same room.

8m or less

• Removal of transport brackets (MMU-AP0151WH type to MMU-AP0301WH type)

• Remove the transport brackets before installation of the indoor unit.

• The transport brackets cannot be removed under condition of ceiling panel installed.

Transport brackets

Indoor unit

Fan motor

Remove 4 screws. (Same at opposite side)

51

• External view

S

Center of air condition main unit

Center of panel

Electric parts box

T

60

R

Unit external dimension D

Hanging bolt pitch C

Ceiling open dimension B

Panel external dimension A

J

K

REQUIREMENT

The hanging bolt pitch on longitudinal direction is not divided at the center with the ceiling opening size. Therefore, check the relational position in the following figure.

If relational position is incorrect, the ceiling panel cannot be installed.

b d

Hanging bolt

4-M10 required at site


(At gas side ØN)

Drain pipe connecting port


(At liquid side ØM)

100 56

75

(Inner dia. Ø32 polyvinyl chloride pipe VP25)

Ø200

Knockout hole for partial duct

Ceiling panel

(Sold separately)

(Provided also at opposite side)

Wire connecting port

Q

Under surface of ceiling

Ø150

210

Q

Knockout hole for fresh air

(At opposite side only)

Model MMUA B C D E

AP0071WH to AP0121WH type 1000 960


880 830

1520 1480 1400 1350


AP0481WH type

650

1898 1850 1700 1650 680

Q R S T U Model MMU-




AP0481WH type

35

15

30

5

35

95

95

105

398

406

F

620

650

V

222 156

230

G

550

620

W

166

H

480

510

X

78

86

J

265

295

K

—

455

Y

150

Z

L

255

M

Ø6.4

N

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

280

288

a

Ø9.5

Ø15.9

b d

178 242 348

186 250 356

70

80

20

24





• If the ceiling has been already set up, draw the drain pipe, refrigerant pipe, indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire, wire for central control system, and remote controller wire up to the position where pipes and wires are to be connected before hanging the indoor unit.

Please procure the hanging bolts, washer and nuts for installation of the indoor unit at local site.

Hanging bolt

Nut

Flat washer

M10 or W3/8

M10 or W3/8

M10

4 pcs.

12 pcs.

8 pcs.

52




Use the pattern for positioning of the ceiling opening hole and the hanging bolt.

Indoor unit


Use the pattern for positioning of the opening hole when setting up a new ceiling.


• Using the attached pattern fixing screws (M5 × 16L: 6 pcs.), attach the installation pattern to the indoor unit.



(Attached)


M5 × 16L screws (Attached)

These screws are exclusive to the installation pattern. When installing the ceiling panel, the other exclusive screws attached to the ceiling panel

(sold separately) are used.)

Installation of ceiling panel (Sold separately)

Install the ceiling panel after piping/wiring work has finished.

Install the ceiling panel according to attached Installation Manual.

Check the installation dimensions of the indoor unit and the ceiling opening are correct, and then install it.

REQUIREMENT

Connect closely the connecting parts between the ceiling panel and the ceiling surface or between the ceiling panel and the indoor unit.

If they are incompletely connected, air leaks resulted in dewing or water leakage.


• Attach the nut (M10 or W3/8: Procured locally) and the plain washer (M10: Procured locally) to the hanging bolt.

• Put washers at up and down of U-groove of the hanging bracket of the indoor unit to hang the indoor unit.

• Using a level vial, check that four sides are horizontal. (Horizontal degree: Within 5mm)

• Cut off the attached installation gauge from the installation pattern.

• Using the installation gauge, check and adjust clearance between the indoor unit and the ceiling opening hole, and the check and adjust the hanging-down height of the unit. (Using direction is printed on the installation gauge.)

1) Check distance between the bottom surface of the indoor unit and the bottom surface of the ceiling board is wider than size A. (4 corners)

2) Check the clearance between the side surface of the indoor unit (longitudinal side) and the ceiling board is same to size B. (Common to right and left)

3) Check the clearance between front surface (Piping side) of the indoor unit and the ceiling board is size C, and then check also the clearance between the rear surface (Piping opposite side) of the indoor unit and the ceiling board is size D.

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

Hanging bolt

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

Indoor unit

Ceiling board

A

B

Installation gauge

Front side

(pipe side)

C


Indoor unit

Installation gauge

Rear side

(Opposite of pipe side)

D

Installation gauge

Model MMU-


AP0481WH type

A B C D

53 35 95 35

68 15 105 95

53

REQUIREMENT

• Using a level vial, etc., confirm the horizontal level of the indoor unit.

• Tighten the nut sufficiently, and fix it securely.

Level vial

Fix securely

Installation of ceiling panel (Sold separately)

Install the ceiling panel according to Installation Manual attached with it after piping/wiring work has completed.

Check that installation of indoor unit and ceiling opening part is correct, and then install it.

REQUIREMENT

Connect closely the connecting sections of ceiling panel and ceiling surface, and the ceiling panel and indoor unit.

If there is clearance, air leakage generates resulting in dewing or water leakage.

54



Secure the space required to installation and servicing.


<MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH>

Refrigerant piping port

Ceiling inside height :

245mm or more

Removal of transporting rubbers

<MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH>

• Before installation of the indoor unit, remove the two protective rubbers for transportation which are inserted between the reinforcing bracket for the fan motor and the casing.

(Hand over the protective rubbers for transportation to the customers and ask to keep them because they are used for transportation such as reinstallation.)

Protective rubbers for transportation

(remove)

100mm and more

100mm and more

Ceiling

200mm or more

Pull upward to remove.

<MMU-AP0151SH to AP0241SH>

Casing

Reinforcing bracket

200mm and more

Ceiling

1000mm and more

Obstacle

1000mm and more

(Piping side)

(Discharge port)

Height of ceiling

When height of the ceiling exceeds 3.0m, it is difficult that the hot air reaches up to the floor surface. In this case, it is necessary to exchange the motor speed-up by using a connector, which is attached to the air conditioner unit.

Installable height of ceiling

Up to 3.0m

Considering cabling and cable connecting works in the ceiling after hanging the indoor unit, select an installation place and determine drawing direction of the cables.

• In a case that the ceiling has been already existed, draw refrigerant cable, drain cable, indoor connecting cable and remote controller cord up to the position where pipes and cables are to be connected in advance when hanging the indoor unit.

• Check dimension of the indoor unit, determine size of the indoor unit itself and the ceiling opening and perform positioning, using the attached installation pattern.

(The pattern is attached to bottom surface with five M5 x 20 screws.)

55

External view <MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH>

20

Panel external dimension

1050

Ceiling open dimension

1010

890

20

Power connecting port


(VP25)

225

150

100

110

395

Center of panel

850

455

50

Hanging bolt

4-M10 Arranged at site

850

Support metal


(Gas side Ø9.5)


(Liquid side Ø6.4)

Ceiling panel

(Sold separately)

Discharge louver

1050

Discharge port

Ceiling bottom surface

400

Panel mounting hole 5 positions

Air suction grille

Space necessary for installation and servicing

• Wired remote controller

(RBC-AMT21E)

4

100 or more

100 or more

200 or more

120

16

56

External view <MMU-AP0151SH to AP0241SH>

30

65

Z

C

Panel external dimension A

Ceiling open dimension B

Center of panel D

125

30

Power connecting port


(VP25)

165


(Gas side) J

50

10

E F

Y

Y view

Pitch 200 × I

110

10

100

Knockout hole for front blow out

H

100

A


(RBC-AMT21E)

4


(Liquid side) K

100

120

160

Z view

Ø180

G

Ø150 Knockout hole (For taking in fresh air)

(When take in fresh air, attach a filter, etc. so that fresh air does not enter directly.)

Note

When using the discharge divided duct and the duct to take in fresh air, consult your dealer about availability.

Space necessary for installation and servicing

Ceiling

1000 or more

Obstacle

1000 or more

(Pipe side)

(Air outlet port)

Model

AP0151, AP0181

AP0241

A B

1220 1160

1420 1360

C

545

645

D

485

585

E

530

630

F

470

570

G

254

460

H

800

1000

I

4

5

J K

Ø12.9

Ø6.4

Ø15.9

Ø9.5

120

16

57





• If the ceiling has been already set up, draw the drain pipe, refrigerant pipe, indoor/outdoor interunit cable, cable for central control system, and remote controller cable up to the position where pipes and cables are to be connected before hanging the indoor unit.

Please procure the hanging bolts and nuts for installation of the indoor unit at local site.

Hanging bolt

Nut

Flat washer

M10 or W3/8

M10 or W3/8

M10

4 pieces

12 pieces

8 pieces




Use the installation pattern for positioning of the ceiling opening hole and the hanging bolt.


Use the installation pattern for positioning of the opening hole when setting up a new ceiling.


• Using the attached installation pattern fixing screws (M5 ×

20L: 4 pieces), attach the installation pattern to the indoor unit.



Ceiling panel fixing screw

(Use the attached screws.)

Pattern sheet


CAUTION

This unit is incorporated with drain pump and float switch. Never incline the main unit. Otherwise, malfunction of the float switch may be caused resulting in water leakage.

• Attach the nut (M10 or W3/8: Procured locally) and the attached washer (Ø34mm) to the hanging bolt.

• Adjust nut position (lower side) so that clearance between (lower side) and the lower side of ceiling board is

137mm.

• Hang up the main unit by hanging nut of hanging bolt to T groove of hanging bracket of the indoor unit.

• Using the level vial, etc., check the horizontal level of the indoor unit.

• Using the installation pattern, check and adjust the positional relation between the indoor unit and ceiling opening hole, and hanging-up height of the indoor unit.

Hanging bolt

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

Nut

(W3/8 or M10)

(1)

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

(2)

M10 flat washer

(Accessory)

(1) Required those other than M10 flat washer at site.

(2) To prevent falling-off of bolt (safety), be sure to set it just under the hanging bracket as shown in the figure.

Hanging bolt

Nut (Upper side)

Washer

(Upper side)

(Hanging bracket main unit)

Washer

(Lower side)

Nuts (Lower side)


58

• The used screws when attaching the installation pattern are used again to install the panel.

• Using the ceiling panel fixing screws, fix the installation pattern under surface of the indoor unit.

• Fit the ceiling opening size to outside of the installation pattern.

Opening part

(Ceiling opening dimension)

110

Outline of indoor unit

50

P0151, P0181 : 1160

P0241 : 1360

(Ceiling opening dimension)


Lower side of installation pattern


<MMU-AP0151SH to AP0241SH>

c

Check lower side of the indoor unit locates at position 15mm higher than bottom surface of the ceiling board. (4 corners) d

Check clearance between the side of the indoor unit and the ceiling board is 20mm.

(Both left/right) e

Check clearance between the front side (piping side) of the indoor unit and the ceiling board is

110mm, and clearance between rear side of indoor unit and the ceiling board is 50mm.

Indoor unit

1

Rear side

50

20

2

Ceiling board

Installation gauge

Front side

(Piping side)

110

3

Ceiling board

Installation gauge

• Match the bottom surface of ceiling and lower side of installation pattern on the same level.

GOOD NOT GOOD NOT GOOD

Indoor unit

Lower side of installation pattern

Match on the same level.


• Fix the indoor unit securely by tightening nut at upper side.

Level vial

Indoor unit

Protruding : 0mm or more

Fix securely

REQUIREMENT

• Using a level vial, etc., confirm the horizontal level of the indoor unit.

• Tighten the nut sufficiently, and fix it securely.

Indoor unit

Drawing : 3mm or less

Installation of ceiling panel


Install the ceiling panel according to Installation

Manual after piping/wiring work has completed.

Check that installation of indoor unit and ceiling opening part is correct, and then install it.

REQUIREMENT

Connect the connecting sections of ceiling panel and ceiling surface, and the ceiling panel and indoor unit closely.

If there is clearance, air leakage generates resulting in dewing or water leakage.

59

6-6. Concealed Duct Type


Reserve space required for maintenance the indoor unit and service work.

700mm *1 700mm *1

Electric parts box

Air filter

Air outlet

Electric parts box

25mm

Ceiling opening size C

Ceiling opening size D

Check port B

450mm

Air outlet

Ceiling opening part

Air filter

700mm for maintenance of air filter

MODEL MMD-AP

Set width (mm)

Air filter width (mm)

Ceiling opening size C

Ceiling opening size D

(150mm)

Check port A

450mm

700mm for maintenance of air filter

Notes)

*1 Be sure that space with 700mm or more is reserved for attachment/detachment at the taking-out direction of the air filter.

*2 Be sure to set a check port (A) for the refrigerant piping, drain piping, maintenance of drain pan, etc; otherwise maintenance for devices is unavailable.

*3 If the taking-out direction of the air filter is set at the left side, be sure to set a check port (B) at the left side of the set for attachment/detachment of the air filter. If there is no check port (B), the air filter cannot be attached or detached.

*4 Be sure to set a ceiling opening for maintenance of the electric ports such as fan motor; otherwise maintenance for electric parts such as fan motor is unavailable.

0071BH to 0121BH 0151BH to 0181BH 0241BH to 0301BH 0361BH to 0561BH

550

508

600

700

655

750

1000

960 (480

∗

2)

1050

1350

1310 (655

∗

2)

1400

470 470 470 470

Unit: [mm]

Installation under high-humidity atmosphere

In some cases including the rainy season, especially inside of the ceiling may become high-humidity atmosphere

(dew-point temperature: 23°C or higher).

1. Installation to inside of the ceiling with tiles on the roof

2. Installation to inside of the ceiling with slated roof

3. Installation to a place where inside of the ceiling is used for pathway to intake the outside air

• In the above cases, additionally attach the thermal insulator (Glass wool, etc.) to all positions of the air conditioner, which come to contact with the high-humidity atmosphere. In this case, arrange the side plate

(Service plate) so that it is easily removed.

[Reference]

Dewing test conditions

• Apply also a sufficient thermal insulation to the duct and

Indoor side: 27°C dry bulb temperature

24°C wet bulb temperature connecting part of the duct.

Air volume: Low air volume, operation time 4 hours

60

External view

129

Knock-out hole Ø125

(Air take-in port)

6-Ø4 Tapping screw hole Ø160


(RBC-AMT21E)

4

<Air outlet side>

Hanging bolt pitch B

Main unit dimension A

Drain pipe connecting port for vinyl chloride pipe

(Inner dia. 32, VP. 25)


(Gas side ØF)

Hanging bolt

4-M10 screw

(Arranged locally)

75

41

Main unit dimension 800

50

Hanging bolt pitch 700

638

498

393

59

44

49

196

C

<Air inlet side>

Hanging bolt pitch B

Main unit dimension A


(Liquid side ØG)

Hanging bolt

4-M10 screw

(Arranged locally)

Ø26 Power supply, remote controller cable take-out port

120

16

D

Unit: [mm]

Model MMDA B C D F G

AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH

550 616 350 470 9.5

6.4

AP0151BH, AP0181BH

700 766 500 620 12.7

6.4

AP0241BH, AP0271BH, AP0301BH

1000 1066 800 920 15.9

9.5

AP0361BH, AP0481BH, AP0561BH

1350 1416 1150 1270 15.9

9.5

Opening hole on ceiling and placing of hanging bolt

• Considering the indoor unit and the hanged-up piping/wiring work, determine the installation position and direction.

• After installation position of the indoor unit has been determined, open a hole on the wiring and place the hanging bolt.

• For opening size of the ceiling and the hanging bolt pitch, see the external view.

• When the ceiling has already boarded, draw the drain pipe, refrigerant pipe, inter-unit wire between indoor and outdoor units, central control system wire, and remote controller wire up to the position where pipes and wires are connected before hanged-up the indoor unit.

Hanging bolt M10 or W3/8 4 pieces

The hanging bolts and nuts will be procured locally.

Nut M10 or W3/8 12 pieces

Setup of outside static pressure

Be sure to set up a tap change based upon the resistance (External static pressure) of the duct to be connected.

To change the external static pressure, setup the item code (DN) from wired remote controller is necessary. (Item code = [5d])

For details of procedure, refer to the section of

“13-1”.

<Change on wired remote controller>

Setup data

0000

0001

0003

0006

Outside static pressure

40Pa

70Pa *1

Standard (At shipment)

High static pressure 1

100Pa *2

20Pa

High static pressure 2

High static pressure

*1: 65Pa for Model AP0481BH, AP0561BH

*2: 90Pa for Model AP0481BH, AP0561BH

61

6-7. Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type

Duct design

1. In order to prevent short circuits, design the duct work so that the intake and discharge openings are not adjacent to each other.

2. The indoor unit does not have a built-in air filter.

Always install the air filter (Local procure) in a location that permits easy maintenance, such as behind the intake grille. (If no air filter is installed, dust will collect in the heat exchanger, which may cause the air conditioner to fail or to leak.)

<Air supply connecting flange>

MMD-AP0181H to AP0271H

<Overview of duct connection>

NOTE : Parts except air conditioner unit are to be locally procured.

Canvas joint Canvas joint

(Air conditioner)

Silencer chamber

Air supply port

Silencer chamber

Check port

Air inlet

Air filter

<Air return connecting flange>

MMD-AP0181H to AP0361H

25

4-Ø8 hole

12

MMD-AP0361H

400

426

25

12

25

6-Ø8 hole

25

MMD-AP0481H

275

550

275

25

25

25

6-Ø8 hole

12

MMD-AP0481H

348

670

348

25

12

25

8-Ø8 hole

25 300

900

25

300 300 25

25

8-Ø8 hole

12 316

770

164

MMU-AP0721H to AP0961H

316

1080

(I/D)

25

25

12

25

1080

(I/D)

65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65

65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65

<Air supply side connecting flange> <Return air side connecting flange>

REQUIREMENT

If the air conditioner unit and the canvas joint are connected with the rivets, the fan and the refrigerating cycle become unavailable to be checked. Be sure to use the bolts for tightening the flange.

(Fixing bolts M6 × 12 Field-supplied)

62

Service space

MMU-AP0721H to AP0961H

Distance from building

Service space

Electric parts box

Service space

Check port

600 x 600mm

Check port

For reference

<Square duct>

(Procured locally)

MMD-0071BH to 0561BH

Return Air side

G-Ø5 mm holes

For supply air side

For return air side

C

B

A

18

25

18

25

18

25

Supply Air side

D

A

G-Ø5 mm holes

18

25

18

18

25 18

18

25

J

A

J

H

J

A

J

H

Return Air side

(Return filter side)

Supply Air side

Model MMD-

AP0071BH to AP0121BH








A

700

1000

1350

550

850

1200

B

—

700

1050

455 (65 x 7)

715 (65 x 11)

1105 (65 x 17)

C

400

430

580

D

—

—

—

65

65

65

530

830

1180

E

420

420

420

265

265

265

F

390

390

390

245

245

245

G

4

8

8

H

350

500

675

I

195

195

J

—

195 350

525

Unit: [mm]

K

—

—

—

20

28

40

275

425

600

132.5

227.5

132.5

307.5

132.5

552.5

130

130

130

63

External view

Installing the four 10mm-diameter hanging bolts

• Space the hanging bolts according to the dimensions shown in the diagrams below.

• Use 10mm-diameter hanging bolts (Required at the site).

MMD-AP0181H to AP0481H MMD-AP0721H to AP0961H

C

D (Bolt pitch)

4-Ø10 hanging bolt

(Local procure)

Model MMDA B C D

AP0181H to AP0361H

800mm 850mm 660mm 700mm

AP0481H

1060mm 1200mm 1288mm 1328mm


(Gas side)

4-M10 hanging bolt

(Local procure)

1288 (Hanging bolt pitch)

1328

Electric parts box


(Gas side Ø22.2 Brazed)


(Liquid side Ø12.7 Flared)

1250


660

105

110 60

(Size of main unit)


(Liquid side)

22

46

65


624

698

<Treatment of ceiling>

A ceiling is treated differently according to the structure of the building. For details, contact the constructor or the interior finish worker.

For treatment of the ceiling board after removal, it is important to reinforce the ceiling (Framework) so as to prevent the ceiling board from vibration and to keep the level of the existing ceiling correctly.

Installation of hanging bolt







Reinforcing steel

Anchor bolt




Hanging bolt




Installation of remote controller (Sold separately)

For installation of the remote controller, follow to the Installation Manual attached to the remote controller.


64

6-8. Under Ceiling Type


Secure the specified space in the figure for installation and servicing.

250 or more

Height of ceiling

Set the installable height of the ceiling within 4m, otherwise the air distribution will become poor.

If height of ceiling exceeds 3.5m, hot air becomes difficult to reach the floor surface, and then the change of setup of high ceiling is necessary.

When incorporating a filter sold separately, the change of setup of high ceiling is also necessary.

For the change method of high ceiling, refer to the application control, “In case of installation to high ceiling” and “In case of incorporating filter sold separately” in this Manual.

List of installable ceiling height

Setup data

0000

0001

Standard (At shipment)

High ceiling 1

3.5m or less

4.0m or less

According to the conditions of installation, setup time of turning-on of filter sign (notification of filter cleaning) of the remote controller can be changed.

When it is difficult to warm up the room due to installation place or structure of the room, the detection temperature of heating can be raised.

For change the setup time, refer to the application control, “Change of filter sign turning-on time” and

“How to increase the heating effect” in this Manual.

Slide

Suction grille fixing knob

250 or more

Before installation

1. Removal of suction grille

Slide the suction grille fixing knobs (two positions) toward the arrow direction, and then open the suction grille.

Under the condition of suction grille opened, push the hook section of hinges (two positions) at the rear side, and then pull out the suction grille.

Pull out suction grille while pushing hook.

Hinge

Suction grille

2. Removal of side panel

After removing the side panel fixing screws (1 each at right and left), slide the side panel forward and then remove it.


Decide the position which remote controller is operated and the installation place.

And then refer to the Installation Manual of the wireless remote controller kit sold separately.

(The signal of the wireless type remote controller can be received within approx. 8m. This distance is a criterion and varies a little according to capacity of the battery, etc.)

• To prevent malfunction, select a place where is not affected by a fluorescent lamp or direct sunlight.

• Two or more (up to 6 units) wireless-type indoor units can be set in a room.

Side panel

Slide forward.

Protector

Level flap

Approx. 8m

3. Removal of protective vinyl

Peel out the protective vinyl on the level flap.

4. Removal of protector

Remove the protectors (2 pcs.) of the fan.

(MMC-AP0241H, AP0271H only)

65

External view

REQUIREMENT


• Do not put a heavy article on the indoor unit. (Even units are packaged)


• Do not apply force to the other parts (refrigerant pipe, drain pan, foamed parts, or resin parts, etc.).


128

84

Upper pipe draw-out port (Knockout hole)

Power supply cable take-in port (Knockout)

216

Remote controller cable take- in port

(Knockout hole) 110 76

210

167

105

Pipe draw-out port (Knockout hole)

Drain port VP20

(Inner dia. Ø26, hose attached)

Left drain size

Refrigerant pipe

(Liquid side ØC)

B (Hanging position)

Refrigerant pipe (Gas side ØD)

75

Hanging bolt

Ceiling surface

Unit

146


97

135

347

262

Remote controller cable take-in port

Power supply cable take-in port (Knockout hole)

Remote controller cable take-in port

(Knockout hole)

84

A

Outside air take-in port

(Duct sold separately)(Knockout hole Ø92)

Pipe hole on wall (Ø100 hole)

Drain left pipe draw-out port (Knockout hole)

Wireless sensor mounting section

Model MMC-

AP0151H, AP0181H

AP0241H, AP0271H

AP0361H, AP0481H

A

910

1180

1595

B

855

1125

1540

C D

Ø6.4

Ø12.7

Ø9.5

Ø15.9

Considering pipe/wire connecting work inside the ceiling after the indoor unit has been hanged, select an installation place and determine piping direction.

• If the ceiling has already been set before hanging the main unit, prepare refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, indoor connecting wire, remote controller cord, etc. up to the place where pipe and wire can be connected.

• Check the size of the indoor unit, and match the indoor unit size using the attached installation pattern.

How to use attached installation pattern

Using the pattern, positioning of the hanging bolt and pipe hole can be performed.

* As an error to some degree may generate on the pattern size due to temperature and humidity, be sure to confirm the size.


Ceiling surface

Wall face

66

Installation of hanging bolts







Rubber

Anchor bolt




Hanging bolt

Pipe knockout hole

• In case of taking pipe from the rear side

* Cut off the groove section with a plastic cutter, etc.

Grooves

100

Rear cover

Opened when refrigerant pipe is taken out from the rear side

Opened when only drain pipe is taken out from the rear side

• In case of taking pipe from right side

* Cut off the groove section with a metal saw or plastic cutter, etc.

Groove




Side panel (Right)

• In case of taking pipe from left side

Taking pipe from left side is applied only to the drain pipe.

The refrigerant pipe cannot be taken out from the left side.

* Cut off the groove section with a metal saw or plastic cutter, etc.

Draw-out direction of pipe/cable

• Decide installation place of the unit and draw-out direction of pipe and cable.

Knockout hole of power cable take-in port

Open the power cable take-in port (Knockout hole) shown in the external view and then mount the attached bushing.

67

Groove

Side panel (Left side)

• In case of taking pipe from upper side

Taking pipe from upper side is applied only to the refrigerant pipe.

When taking out the drain pipe from the upper side, use a drain up kit sold separately.

Open the upper pipe draw-out port (Knockout hole) shown in the external view.

(Knockout hole of thin plate)

After piping, cut off the attached thermal insulator of the top plate to pipe shape, and then seal the knockout hole.


• Preparation before holding down main unit

* Confirm the presence of the ceiling material beforehand because the fixing method of hanging metal when the ceiling material is set differs from that when the ceiling material is not set.

<There is ceiling material>

Hanging bolt

(Procured locally)

Ceiling surface

Indoor

unit

Hanging metal

Washer (Accessory)

Double nut

(Procured locally)

Nut

(Procured locally)

Hanging bolt

(Procured locally)

Ceiling surface

Indoor

unit

Hanging metal

Washer (Accessory)

Double nut

(Procured locally)

* Tighten the hanging metal with upper/lower nuts as shown in the figure.

<There is no ceiling material>

Indoor

unit

Hanging bolt

(Procured locally)

Washer

(Procured locally)

Washer (Accessory)

Double nut

(Procured locally)

• Holding down of main unit

1) Attach washer and nuts to the hanging bolt.

Ceiling surface

Washer

(Accessory)

Double nut

(Procured locally)

Hanging bolt

2) Hang the unit to the hanging bolt as shown the figure below.

3) As shown in the figure below, fix the ceiling material securely with the double nuts.

REQUIREMENT

• The ceiling surface may not be horizontal. Be sure to confirm that width and depth directions are level.

Installation of remote controller



• Pull out the remote controller cord together with the refrigerant pipe or drain pipe.

Be sure to pass the remote controller cord through upper side of the refrigerant pipe and drain pipe.

• Do not leave the remote controller at a place exposed to the direct sunlight and near a stove.

• Operate the remote controller, confirm that the indoor unit receives a signal surely, and then install it. (Wireless type)

• Keep 1m or more from the devices such as television, stereo, etc.

(Disturbance of image or noise may generate.)

(Wireless type)

68

6-9. High Wall Type (1 series)





The transport brackets are provided. Following to the table, remove the brackets according to direction of pipe. (Left, right, center) (For AP0071H to AP0181H, only (left) and (right) transport brackets are provided.)

• Remove the installation plate.

Installation plate

Pipe side piping Parts to be removed

Right side piping

Rear side piping

Remove transport bracket (right) only.

Left side piping Remove all transport brackets.

REQUIREMENT

After removing of the transport brackets, do not apply force on the lower cabinet. It is to prevent deformation and breakage.

Transport bracket

(Left)

Transport bracket

(Center)

Transport bracket

(Right)

Pipe connecting position

<Front view>

Top end of installation plate

(Including installation plate)

210

77 Installation plate (Accessory)

Liquid side

Gas side

Refrigerant pipe connecting port liquid side B

Refrigerant pipe connecting port gas side A

Drain pipe

60

110

<Bottom view>

Shipping from factory (Left side piping)

Left and right side piping

(Knockout hole)

380

450

480


Gas pipe 440

Liquid pipe 540

Drain pipe 560

Model MMK-

AP0071H to AP0121H

AP0151H, AP0181H

AP0241H

A

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9

B

Ø6.4

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

69

The lighting time setup of the filter sign (Notification of filter cleaning) of the remote controller can be changed according to the condition of installation. If the room is not heated due to the installation place or construction of the room, the detection temperature of heating can be raised.

For setup method, refer to “Change of lighting time of filter sign” and “To secure better effect of heating” in the

Applicable controls of this Manual.


The sensor of indoor unit with wireless remote controller can receive a signal within approx. 8m. Based upon it, determine a place where the remote controller is operated and the installation place of the indoor unit.

• To prevent a malfunction, select a place where is not influenced by a florescent light or direct sunlight.

• Two or more (Up to 6 units) indoor units with wireless remote controller can be installed in the same room.

8m or less


WARNING





REQUIREMENT


• Do not put a heavy article on the indoor unit. (Even units are packaged.)


• To move the indoor unit, do not apply force to the refrigerant pipe, drain pan, foamed parts, or resin parts, etc.


Be careful to the following items when installing the unit.

• Considering air discharge direction, select an installation place where discharge air can circulate evenly in a room.

Avoid to install the unit at place with “NOT GOOD” mark in the following figure.

GOOD

Good installation place

Cooled well all over.

NOT GOOD

Bad installation place

Screen

70

• To increase effect of drain, confirm the unit is installed horizontally or slightly lowering rightward viewed from the front side.

GOOD NOT GOOD

Lowering rightward viewed from the front side

Lowering leftward viewed from the front side

Horizontal installation

• The mass including installation plate of the indoor unit is shown in the following table. Check whether the wall has sufficient intensity.

Model MMK-

0071H to 0121H

0151H to 0181H

0241H

Mass (kg)

20

22

29

• When installing the side plate, check the status that hook is inserted in square hole. Push in the side plate until it is stuck closely to the indoor unit.

Hook

Square hole

Screw cap

• Do not install the unit by plugging in the wall.

Indoor unit

Side plate fixing screws

Installation of installation plate

• Using the installation pattern, determine the installation position of the indoor unit, and drill the pipe hole matching with the position indicated in the installation pattern. When passing the refrigerant pipe through wall using metal mesh, be sure to use insulation sleeve such as polyvinyl chloride pipe.

(1) Determine vertical position of the installation plate by interval (height) between the indoor unit and the ceiling.

(2) Determine the position so that screw hole of installation plate locates at the center of pillar or stud by adjusting left/right position without changing height of the installation plate.

(3) Tighten the screws (accessory parts) after bore preholes with a gimlet in the stud to prevent the crack.

(1) After drilling holes with interval by 150mm at the selected positions on the concrete wall, strike in grip anchor or hole-in anchor.

(2) Fix the installation plate to the anchor with bolt or nut.

However, when using hole-in anchor, adjust drilling depth so that screw head-out is 10mm or less.

Grip anchor

Bolt

Hole-in anchor

Nut screw dia. Ø8

Installation plate

Concrete wall

Installation plate

10mm or less

Concrete wall

REQUIREMENT

• Conduit tube may be buried in the concrete wall. Ask the constructor it.

• Before installation of the indoor unit, be sure to check whether the installation plate has been completely installed.

Using the installation pattern, determine the pipe hole position, and drill a pipe hole slightly lowering downward.

71


(1) Pass the drain pipe through the wall hole, and hang the indoor unit to the top end of the installation plate.

(2) Check that top end of the installation plate is inserted in by moving the indoor unit to left and right sides.

(3) Fix bottom end of the installation plate and the lower cabinet with screw so that the indoor unit does not move.

Hang up

Installation plate

Screwing

Hook

Square hole

Lower cabinet

Screw cap

Remove the right side plate as the following procedure.

(1) Remove two side plate fixing screws.

(2) Remove the side plate by turning the gray colored part counterclockwise to remove hooks in the square hole of the suction grille.

(3) When piping is in direction from right side, cut off the knockout of the side plate with knife, etc, and finish the end face.

2

1 Side plate fixing screws

Be sure to support A part with hands while pipe is formed.

A

Work after removing the lower cabinet.

(1) Remove the left/right side plates.

(2) Remove two screws of the lower cabinet.

(3) Pull the lower cabinet toward you lowering a little.

• Insert the right side plate observing click of the side plate. (Refer to right side plate installation drawing.)

• Fix the side plate, and cover the screw head with attached cap.

Be sure to support A part with hands while pipe is formed.

Side face

Do not turn horizontally.

Knockout of right side plate

Turn it upward/downward.

Knockout of left side plate

Open

72

6-10. Floor Standing Cabinet Type

Installation space and service space

500mm or more

200mm or more

Front side

Front side

(In case of right direction piping)

<Indoor unit>

• Install an indoor unit as described below.

1. Prior to piping or electric work, remove the air inlet grille.

(Push down the upper part slightly and pull it toward you.)

2. Remove the front panel.

(Fixing screws at right and left sides of the lower side)

<Good installation> <Poor installation>

3. Remove the fan guard.

(Fixing screws at right, center and left sides)

Fan guard screws Front panel screws

4. Then start piping and cabling works.

5. Keep the front space of the indoor unit as wider as possible.

A wide space is required for maintenance and service works and then it is useful for distributing cool/hot air in the room resulted in increase of cooling/heating effect.

6. Install the indoor unit horizontally or slanting a little rightward viewed from the front side.

How to remove the panel before piping and electric wiring

1. Remove the air inlet grille (4 hooks at top and bottom each) and then remove the fan guard (6 screws) for piping work.

2. Remove the front panel (2 screws) for wiring work

Fan guard

73

Hooks

Front panel

Hooks

Air inlet grile

Hooks

Hooks

6-11. Floor Standing Concealed Type

Before installation

REQUIREMENT

• A drain filter to prevent drain clogging is attached to the indoor unit. Since the drain filter is attached outside of the unit, clogging due to dust, foreign matters may occur during work, be sure to clean the strainer before delivery. Please clean the drain filter in the periodical check.

• The air filter is provided under the main unit. Be sure to clean air filter before delivery.


Model MML-



A

610

910

Pull air filter to the arrow mark, and remove the air filter.

Air filter


1. Carry in the indoor unit as packaged up to installation place.

2. Remove foamed polystylene cushion for protection during transportation, which is entered under left/right side plate of the main unit and electric parts box.

Also, when installing the unit, remove tape for transportation adhered to the electric parts box.

3. Install the indoor unit before lining the wall.

220 or more

A

70

220 or more

Tape for transportation

<Fixing of unit>

Fix the indoor unit to the floor and wall by attaching two or four

M8 anchor bolts to the position in the following figure to tighten and fix with nut utilizing holes at left/right side plates.

Electric parts box

Foamed polystylene cushion

Foamed polystylene cushion

(Both left and right)

In case of fixing the indoor unit to wall

Fix the indoor unit to the wall as described below.

1. Referring to the following figure, fix four M8 anchor bolts to the wall.

2. As shown in the figure, attach the bolts preciously to the upper two anchor bolts.

3. Using a screwdriver, etc, open knockout hole at rear side of the indoor unit.

4. Hang the indoor unit to the anchor bolts.

5. Tighten the nuts to the two lower anchor bolts.

700mm

520mm

125mm

215mm

1 to 2mm

15mm MAX

Screwdriver

Knockout hole

Mount the upper two nuts as shown in the figure below.

Tighten the lower two nuts after the unit has been mounted.

Anchor bolts (two at left and right)

Rear

In case of fixing the indoor unit to floor

To fix the indoor unit to the floor, pass two anchor bolts attached on the floor through a hole of the bottom plate of the indoor unit, and then tighten and fix it with the nuts.

Front

400mm 275mm

74

External view

Lower refrigerant piping port

(50 × 100 knockout hole)

Hole for floor fixing

(2-Ø10)

400 120

Air outlet port

690 260

Operation switch section

(Sold separately)

230

10 × 20 long hole

Hole for wall fixing × 2

(with Ø22 knockout hole)

Power supply cord hole

(Ø26 knockout)

(Both sides)

700

520

Hole for wall fixing

(2-12 × 25 long hole)

Air inlet port

950

30

130

Refrigerant pipe port

(50 × 100 knockout hole)

( )

(Both sides)

100 left side

120

Refrigerant pipe port

(Ø130 knockout hole)

Space required for service

(Figure shows piping at the right side)

Wall

(Front side)

500 or more

(Front side)

Wall

Dimensions

Model MML-

AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H

AP0151H, AP0181H

AP0241H

97

35

A

Ø6.4

Ø6.4

Ø9.5

B

Ø9.5

Ø12.7

Ø15.9


(Liquid side ØA)


(Gas side ØB)


(Ø20)

177

Piping positional drawing

5 136






• Install the remote controller 1m apart from the devices such as TV or stereo. (Image may be disturbed or noise may be output.) (Wireless type)

75

In case of fixing indoor unit to floor

<Indoor unit viewed from overhead>

In case of fixing indoor unit to wall

<Indoor unit viewed from front side>

A

(Front side)

B

Model MML-



A B

580 610

880 910

A

B

(Floor)

Hole is provided to rear side.

Model MML-



A B

580 610

880 910

*

Attach and fix the electric parts box to the wall under condition that electric parts box to be attached to the side face is removed. Remove the electric parts box as follows.

<How to remove the electric parts box>

1. Remove two mounting screws at upper side of the electric parts box.

2. Slide the electric parts box to the arrow mark, and remove it from the set.


For installation of the wired remote controller, follow to the Installation Manual attached to the remote controller.

• Pull out the remote controller cord together with the refrigerant pipe or drain pipe. Be sure to pass the remote controller cord through upper side of the refrigerant pipe and drain pipe.

Electric parts box

Electric parts box mounting screws

(2 pcs)

Electric parts box

Side plate fixing screw

Side plate

76


<Installation space>

REQUIREMENT

When using the air conditioner under condition of high humidity, attach the thermal insulator to the side face and the rear side of the indoor unit.

500mm or more

200mm or more

Front side

Front side

(In case of right direction piping)

Unit fixing bolt

• In case of wooden wall and wooden floor (AP0151 Model to AP0271 Model)

Use the four screw bolts (M8 × L50) for transportation and the two screw bolts attached to inside of the indoor unit.

• In case of wooden wall and wooden floor (AP0361 Model to AP0561 Model)

Use the two screw bolts (M8 × L50) for transportation and the four screw bolts attached to inside of the indoor unit.

• In case of models other than the above

Procure the six anchor bolts (M8 × L50 or longer) at the local site.

In case of fixing the indoor unit to the wall surface

Use the attached wall fixing bracket by inverting it at upper side of the unit. Fix the indoor unit to the wall surface using the attached screw bolts, anchor bolts or etc. at two positions. A many holes for fixing the indoor unit to wall surface and for fixing the indoor unit itself are provided on the bracket. Sliding the bracket right and left sides, select a position which can securely fix the indoor unit and then fix it.

A hole on the wall fixing bracket for the indoor unit is a long hole. Therefore the indoor unit can be fixed at any position keeping clearance from 0 to 50mm.

As shown below, it is also possible to fix the indoor unit without inverting the bracket. (In this case, keep clearance with length of head of the bolt between the indoor unit and the wall.)

Anchor bolts

Screw bolts

Wooden wall

Concrete wall

0mm 50mm

Clearance

(Height of head

of fixing bolt)

77

In case of fixing the indoor unit to the floor

Use the attached the attached floor fixing bracket to fix the lower right and left sides of the indoor unit to the floor.

To fix to the indoor unit, use the side plate screws and use the screw bolts or anchor bolts for fixing to the floor respectively, and then fix the indoor unit at total four positions, two positions for right and left each.

Screws bolts

(Total 4 at right and left)

Screws for side plate

Screws for side plate

Anchor bolts

(Total 4 at right and left)

Wooden wall

640mm

Concrete wall

A

B

Model MMF-

AP0151H to AP0271H type

AP0361H to AP0561H type

A mm

88

258

B mm

42 to 92

52 to 102

Bracket for fixing to wall

Indoor unit fixing figure (Example)

REQUIREMENT

In case of installing the indoor unit to the floor and the wall other than wooden floor and wall, the six anchor bolts (M8 × L50 or longer) are required.

Procure them at the local site.

Air inlet grille

Electric parts cover

Bracket for fixing to floor

Direction of vertical louver

The direction of the auto turn louver (Vertical louver) may change during transportation. As shown below, lift up the vertical louver lightly, turn it matching with the direction of the plastic coupling rod, insert it into clearance of the extrusion, and then arrange the direction of the vertical louver to the desired direction.

Turn the vertical louver while lifting up lightly, and then insert it into the clearance of extrusion of the coupling rod.

Vertical louver

Extrusion

Coupling rod




• Draw out the remote controller cord together with the refrigerant pipe or drain pipe. Be sure to put the remote controller cord at upper side of the refrigerant pipe or drain pipe.



• Install the remote controller 1m apart from the devices such as TV or stereo.

(Image may be disturbed or noise may be output.) (Wireless type)

78

6-12. High Wall Type (2 series)



Keep 100mm or more for clearance between top plate of the indoor unit and the ceiling surface.

Installation diagram of Indoor and outdoor units

Before installing the wireless remote controller

• With the remote controller cover open, load the batteries supplied correctly, observeing their polarity.

2 Wireless remote controller

Cover

170mm or more

Hook

1

Installation plate

For the rear left and left piping

Wall

170mm or more

Insert the cushion between the indoor unit and wall, and tilt the indoor unit for better operation.

Hook

3 Batteries

Shield pipe

Do not allow the drain hose to get slack

Air filter

(Attach to the front panel)

Cut the piping hole sloped slightly

6

Pan head wood screw

Make sure to run the drain hose sloped downward.

The auxiliary piping can be connected the left, rear left, rear right, right, bottom right or bottom left.

2

Wireless remote controller

4

Remote control holder

Right

Rear right

Rear left

Bottom right

∗ When installing the Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit), keep a space more than 300mm for wiring work.

Installation place

• A place which provides the spaces around the indoor unit as shown in the above diagram.

• A place where there is no obstacle near the air inlet and outlet.

• A place that allows easy installation of the piping to the outdoor unit.

• A place which allows the front panel to be opened.

CAUTION

• Direct sunlight to the indoor unit’ s wireless receiver should be avoided.

• The microprocessor in the indoor unit should not be too close to RF noise sources.

Left

Bottom left

79

Remote controller

• A place where there are no obstacles such as a curtain that may block the signal from the remote controller.

• Do not install the remote controller in a place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heating source, such as a stove.

• Keep the remote controller at least 1m apart from the nearest TV set or stereo equipment.

(This is necessary to prevent image disturbances or noise interference.)

• The location of the remote controller should be determined as shown below.

(Side view)

7 m

(Top view)

Indoor unit

5 m

45˚

75˚

Reception range

Reception range

Remote controller

* : Axial distance

45˚

5 m

Remote controller

WARNING





REQUIREMENT


• Do not put a heavy article on the indoor unit. (Even units are packaged.)


• To move the indoor unit, do not apply force to the refrigerant pipe, drain pan, foamed parts, or resin parts, etc.


Be careful to the following items when installing the unit.

• Considering air discharge direction, select an installation place where discharge air can circulate evenly in a room. Avoid to install the unit at place with “NOT

GOOD” mark in the right figure.

GOOD

Good installation place

Cooled well all over.

NOT GOOD

Bad installation place

: Not cooled well.

Screen

80

Cutting a hole

In case of installing the refrigerant pipes from the rear:

1. Decide the hole position for piping at 100mm from the arrow mark ( ) on the installation plate and drill a hole with Ø65mm at a slight downward slant toward outdoor side.

Pipe hole

65 mm

The center of the pipe hole is above the arrow mark.

100 mm

NOTE

• When drilling a wall that contains a metal lath, wire lath or metal plate, be sure to use a pipe hole brim ring sold separately.

Mounting the installation plate

For installation of the indoor unit, use the paper pattern in the accessory parts.

107

127.5

Hook

170

85

Pipe hole

Thread

Hook

Indoor unit

Hook

Pipe hole

Weight

Mounting screw

Installation plate

When the installation plate is directly mounted on the wall

1. Securely fit the installation plate onto the wall by screwing it in the upper and lower parts to hook up the indoor unit.

2. To mount the installation plate on a concrete wall with anchor bolts, utilize the anchor bolt holes as illustrated in the above figure.

3. Install the installation plate horizontally in the wall.

NOT

GOOD

GOOD NOT

GOOD

5mm dia. hole

CAUTION

When installing the installation plate with a mounting screw, do not use the anchor bolt hole.

Otherwise the unit may fall down and result in personal injury and property damage.

Clip anchor

(local parts)

Anchor bolt

Projection

15mm or less

Mounting screw

Ø4 × 25

CAUTION

Failure to firmly install the unit may result in personal injury and property damage if the unit falls.

• In case of block, brick, concrete or similar type walls, make 5mm dia. holes in the wall.

• Insert clip anchors for appropriate mounting screws used for the installation plate.

NOTE

• Secure four corners and lower parts of the installation plate with 4 to 6 mounting screws to install it.

81

7. FLOW SELECTOR UNIT INSTALLATION

This SUPER HRM Air Conditioner is a new type which adopts a new refrigerant HFC (R410A) instead of the conventional refrigerant R22 in order to prevent destruction of the ozone layer.

Be sure to use an indoor or outdoor unit in combination with the new refrigerant.

• This Flow Selector unit is for the new refrigerant HFC (R410A).

• To connect the Flow Selector unit to an outdoor unit with pipes, a branching joint or header is required. Choose one according to the capacity of the units.

• Nitrogen gas is filled in the selection unit.

Be careful when removing flare nuts.

7-1. Accessory Parts

Part name

Q’ty RBM-

Y1122FE Y1802FE

1 1

Shape

—

Usage

(Be sure to hand over to customers.) Installation Manual

Attached wire

(For power supply)

Attached wire

(For control wiring)



1

1

3

2

1

1

3

2

For power supply from indoor unit (3-core, 6m)

For communication with indoor unit (5-core, 6m)

For heat insulating of suction gas, discharge gas, and gas pipe connecting sections

For heat insulating of liquid pipe connecting section

Attached pipe

Attached pipe

Attached pipe

Wire joint

1

1

1

2

—

—

—

2

Ø9.5 - Ø6.4, connection pipe



For connection with certain indoor units

7-2. Installation Space

• Make space for installation and service. (Make space to the electrical parts box cover side for service.)

• When installing the unit inside the ceiling, be sure to create a check port.

The check port is required when the unit is installed and serviced. (Check port: 450*450 or more)

• Keep a clearance of 50 mm or more between the top panel of the unit and the ceiling.

• The length of a connection pipe to the indoor unit should be 5m or less when the attached wires are used.

15m as the maxium length by using the connection cable kit. (RBC-CBK15FE, sold sepalatrly.)

<RBM-Y1122FE (When attached pipes are used)>

50 or

(159)

Outdoor unit side


(Discharge gas)


(Liquid)


(Suction gas)

50 or

Indoor unit side


(Liquid)


(Gas)

Hanging bracket

(118)

50 or

300 or more

200 or more

<RBM-Y1122FE, RBM-Y1802FE>

Electrical parts box cover

50 or

Check port,

450 × 450


50 or

82

<RBM-Y2802FE (when attached pipes are used)>

(198)

(210)

400 or more

(210)

400 or more

Outdoor

unit side

Electrical parts box cover

Indoor unit side

Check port

450X450

7-3. Installation of Flow Selector Unit

WARNING

Install the unit securely in the place to sufficiently withstand the weight of the unit.

If the foundation is not sturdy enough, the unit may fall and cause personal injury.

Perform a specified installation work to guard against earth quake.

Improper installation may cause the unit to fall.

REQUIREMENT

To prevent damage on the Flow Selector unit or personal injury, follow the instructions below.

• Do not step, or put any heavy object on the packed Flow Selector unit.

• When carrying the Flow Selector unit, hold the two hanging brackets and be careful not to apply excessive force to the refrigerant pipes.

83

External view

RBM-Y1122FE/Y1802FE

Outdoor unit side


(Discharge gas)


(Liquid)


(Suction gas)

160 (94)

(55)

320 (Hanging bolt pitch)

250

Indoor unit side


(Liquid)


(Gas)

Hanging bracket

(99)

21

44

87

RBM-Y2802FE


Refrigerant pipe connecting port (Discharge gas)

Refrigerant pipe connecting port (Liquid)

Refrigerant pipe connecting port (Suction gas)

(99)

These coils are on Y1802FE only.

Earth screw (55)

470 (hanging bolt pitch)

54

75


Refrigerant pipe connecting port (Gas)

Refrigerant pipe connecting port (Liquid)

199

(108)

(66)

(398)

(109)

28 38

105

(109)

84

Earth screw

(65)

105

67

Installing hanging bolts

• Considering piping and wiring work after hanging the Flow Selector unit, determine the installation position and direction.

• After determining the installation position of the Flow Selector unit, install the hanging bolts.

• For hanging bolt pitch, see the External View.

• When the ceiling is already installed, draw the pipes to the position where they are to be connected before hanging the unit.

Procure hanging bolts and nuts locally for installing the unit.

Hanging bolt M10 (mm) or W3/8 2 pieces

Nut M10 (mm) or W3/8 6 pieces

Flat washer M10 (mm) 4 pieces

Ceiling preparation

Because ceiling preparation depends on the building structure, consult with the architect or interior finisher.

After removing the ceiling panels, it is important to reinforce the ceiling frames to prevent ceiling panel vibration and to keep the ceiling horizontal.

Installation of hanging bolt







Reinforcing steel

Anchor bolt




Hanging bolt



Use a hole-in anchors, holein plugs, or a hole-in bolts.

Installing Flow Selector unit

• Attach the nuts (M10 (mm) or W3/8: local supply) and flat washers (M10: local supply) to the hanging bolts.

• Put the washers over and under the T-groove of the hanging brackets of the Flow Selector unit to hang down the unit.

• Using a level vial, check that the four sides are horizontal.

(Horizontal degree: Within 5 mm).

Procure the hanging bolts, washers, and nuts locally.

Hanging bolt

(M10 (mm) or

W3/8)

Nut

(M10 (mm) or

W3/8)

M10 (mm) Flat washer

Level vial (Horizontal degree: Within 5 mm)

M10 (mm) Flat washer

To prevent the bolt from coming off, attach the washer just under the hanging bracket as shown in the figure.

Hanging bolt

Nut

(M10 (mm) or

W3/8)

Flow Selector unit

REQUIREMENT

Install the Flow Selector unit with the correct direction as shown in the figure.

If installed with incorrect direction, the Flow

Selector unit will not operate properly.

85

7-4. Refrigerant Piping

WARNING

If refrigerant gas has leaked during the installation work, ventilate the room immediately.

If the leaked refrigerant gas comes in contact with fire, noxious gas may be generated.

After the installation work, confirm that refrigerant gas does not leak.

If refrigerant gas leaks into the room and flows near a fire source, such as a fan heater, cooking stove or heating unit, noxious gas may be generated.

Permissible pipe length and permissible height difference

The length of a connection pipe to the indoor unit should be 5 m or less.

For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.

REQUIREMENT

When the refrigerant pipe is long, set the support brackets to fix the pipe at intervals of 2.5 to 3 m. If the pipe is not fixed, noise may be generated.

Be sure to use the flare nuts attached to the Flow Selector unit or ones for R410A.

Piping material and dimensions

RBM-Y1122FE/Y1802FE

Material

FS unit

Indoor unit

Indoor unit side pipe size (mm)

MM -AP

Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Seamless phosphorus deoxidized copper pipe for air-conditioning

RBM-Y1122FE RBM-Y1802FE

Suction gas pipe

Outdoor unit side pipe size (mm) Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

007-012

*Ø9.5

*Ø6.4

Ø15.9

Ø12.7

Ø9.5

015-018

*Ø12.7

*Ø6.4

Ø15.9

Ø12.7

Ø9.5

024-030

Ø15.9

Ø9.5

Ø15.9

Ø12.7

Ø9.5

036-056

Ø15.9

Ø9.5

Ø15.9

Ø12.7

Ø9.5

∗ Use pipes attached with the FS unit. The pipes are not flared. Flare them when using them.

<RBM-Y1122FE (When attached pipes are used)>

Flare

Pipe procured locally

Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Suction gas pipe

Flare

Attached pipe

Brazing


Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Flare


Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Suction gas pipe

<RBM-Y1122FE, RBM-Y1802FE>

Flare


Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

86

RBM-Y2802FE

Model name


Liquid side

Gas side

Liquid side




Total capacity of indoor unit (kW)

Power Supply

Total Weight

Dimension (mm)

* Use pipes attached with the FS unit.

RBM-Y2802FE

Connecting port

Ø12.7

Connecting method

Flare

*

Ø22.2

Ø12.7

*

Ø15.9

Flare

Flare

Flare

*

Ø22.2

18.0 to 28.0 or less

Flare

Single phase 50Hz 230V (220-240V)

8 kg

Height 200 X Width 398 X Depth 199

Accessory pipe

2

Ø19.1 (Flare)

→ Ø22.2 (Brazing)

1

2

Ø15.9 (Flare)


Ø19.1 (Flare)


<RBM-Y2802FE (When attached pipes are used)>

Attached pipe

Brazing


Discharge gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Suction gas pipe

1

2

Flare

Flare

Attached pipe

Brazing

Gas pipe

2

Liquid pipe


87

8. OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

8-1. Selecting a Location for Installation

CAUTION

Check that it is installed at a place where flammable gas does not leak.

If gas leaks and accumulates on surroundings of the unit, combustion may be caused.

Check that the outdoor unit is fixed to the base.

Otherwise, an accident such as falling may be caused.

REQUIREMENT

• Avoid a location where a machine is generating high frequency.

• Using the air conditioner at a specific location where spray of oil (including machine oil) or steam is possible, salty location such as seaside, or place where gas sulfide generates such as hot spring may cause a trouble.

If doing so, a special maintenance is required. For details, contact the dealer which you purchased it.

• Avoid obstruction of inlet port and outlet port of the outdoor unit so there is no restriction of air flow.

• Avoid to installing the air conditioner in a location where strong wind blows against the inlet or outlet port of the outdoor unit.

• When using the air conditioner at the snow area, mount a snowfall frame or hood to the outdoor unit.

For details, contact the dealer which you purchased the air conditioner.

• Drain water from the outdoor unit to a place having good drainage.

• Set TV or radio 1m or more apart from the main unit of air conditioner or remote controller.

Quality of picture or noise may be affected.

Attention to operation sound

• Select a location with sufficient strength, where operation sound or vibration does not transmit to other entities, or does not increase.

• If an obstacle is put on the near outlet port of the outdoor unit, operation sound may increase.

• Select a position where neighbors are not affected by discharge air from the discharge port of the outdoor unit or the operation sound.

Electric wiring

WARNING

Check that earthing practice is correctly performed.

Grounding is necessary. If earthing practice is incomplete, an electric shock may be caused.

CAUTION

Check the electrical leakage breaker is fitted.

It is necessary to fit an electrical leakage breaker. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.

Only use fuses with the correct capacity.

Using wire or copper wire may cause a fire or trouble.

For the power source, use a circuit with rated voltage exclusive for air conditioner.

88


1. Align the servicing surfaces of the outdoor units and connect them for installation.

2. Considering functions, reserve space necessary for construction and servicing.

(The figure at lower right side shows a case that 3 units are installed connectively.

Outdoor unit top view

Air outlet

Air inlet

Air inlet

Air inlet

Air inlet

(Rear side)

500mm or more

10mm or more

500mm or more

(Front side)

20mm or more 20mm or more

(A case of 3 units are installed.)

10mm or more

Installation work/ servicing surface

Square hole for handling

NOTES :

(1) If there is an obstacle at upper side of the outdoor unit, reserve space of 2000mm or more up to the top end of the outdoor unit.

(2) Install the outdoor unit so that height of obstacle surrounding the outdoor unit is kept 800mm or less from the bottom end of the outdoor unit.

(3) If height of obstacle surrounding the outdoor unit is higher than the outdoor unit, measures such as discharge duct being installed is required.

[1] Outdoor unit carrying in

Handle the outdoor unit in care with the following items.

1. When using a forklift, etc for loading/unloading in transportation, insert pawl of the forklift into the square hole for handling as shown below.

2. When lifting up the unit, insert a rope sufficiently bearable to unit mass into the square hole for handling, and cord the unit from four sides. (Apply a plaster to position where rope fits outdoor unit itself so that flaw or deformation does not generate on the outer surface of the outdoor unit.)

(There provided the reinforcing plates on the side surfaces, so the rope cannot be passed.)

GOOD NOT GOOD

GOOD

Plaster


Forklift Forklift

Rope

Plaster

Reinforcing plate

Square hole for handling

89

[2] Installation of outdoor unit

WARNING

• Perform a specified installation work against a strong wind such as typhoon or earthquake.

If the air conditioner is imperfectly installed, an accident by falling or dropping may be caused.

20mm or more 20mm or more

1. Arrange the outdoor units with 20mm or more intervals. Fix the outdoor unit with M12 anchor bolts (4 positions/unit). 20mm is appropriate to length of anchor bolt.

• Anchor bolt pitch is as shown below.

700 700

M12 anchor bolt

4 positions/unit

700

Continuous hole (15 x 20 long hole)

*

However, piping equivalent length should not exceed 25m between the outdoor unit nearest to the indoor unit and the farthest outdoor unit from the indoor unit on piping path in one refrigerating cycle system.

2. When taking the refrigerant pipe from underside, set height of the stool by 500mm or more.

90

3. Do not use four stools to set the four corners.

NOT GOOD

GOOD

4. Mount the vibration-proof rubber (vibration-proof block etc.) so that it catch whole the clamping leg.

GOOD GOOD

Install the vibration-proof rubber so that bent part of the fixing leg is grounded.

Anchor bolt

Vibration-proof rubber

NOT GOOD

Bent part of the fixing leg is not grounded.


5. Be careful to connecting arrangement of the header unit and the follower units.

Set the outdoor units in the order from one with large capacity. (A (Header unit) > B > C)

6. Be careful to connecting arrangement of header unit and follower unit.

1) Be sure to use a header unit for the leading outdoor unit to be connected to the main pipe. (Figure 1)

2) However, as shown in the figure below, T-shape branching joint which is sold separately can be connected to connect to the main pie within piping indicated with a bold line in the following figure. (Figure 2)

3) Be careful to direction of T-shape branching joint. (As shown in Figure 3, T-shape branching joint cannot be attached so that refrigerant of the main pipe flows directly to the header unit.)

Figure 1

A

Header

GOOD

B C

Follower Follower

Figure 2

A

Header

GOOD

B C

Follower Follower

Figure 3

NOT GOOD

A

Header

B C

Follower Follower

Extension valve

Extension valve

Main pipe

To indoor unit

Main pipe

To indoor unit

Main pipe

To indoor unit

91

8-2. Standards for Rooftop Collective Installation

When outer wall is taller than outdoor units

1) When a vent is installed

500 or more

600 or more

(front)

10mm or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

Air outlet duct

Vs

Vent

1000 or more c

The aperture ratio should permit an intake velocity Vs through the vent of 1.5m/s.

d

The height of the air outlet duct is HD = H–h.

2) When a vent cannot be installed

500 or more

600 or more

(front)

10mm or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more c

Install a base so that the height of wall is the same as that of air outlet duct.

(Height for a base is 500 to 1000mm.) d

The height of the air outlet duct is HD = H–h’.

92

Air outlet duct

Vs

Base

1) One-row installation

When outer wall is shorter than outdoor units

500 or more

500 or more

(Front side)

10mm or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

800 or less

2) Two-row installation

(Front side)

(Front side)

3) Three-row installation

10mm or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

800 or less

(Front side)

(Front side)

(Front side)

10mm or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

20 or more

800 or less

* These examples assume that the refrigerant lines are routed out the front of the units. (When pipes on the site are run from the outdoor units to the front horizontally, there should be at least 500mm of space between the outdoor units and the horizontal pipes.)

93

Piping

500 or more

Piping

500 or more

Floor by floor installation

200 or more

20 or more

20 or more

200 or more

V

D

V

S

(Front)


1) Install the air outlet duct for every outdoor unit.

(When a vent is installed, the air outlet duct should be stuck to the vent.)

2) Flap angle of the vent is 20-degree facing down from the horizontal level.

3) Intake velocity VS through the vent is 1.5m/s. or less.

Air discharge velocity VD trough the vent is 4 - 5m/s. or less.

[NOTE]

This installation is applied to the case less than 10th floor to avoid the influence of locally strong wind blowing along a street of very tall buildings.

94

9. ELECTRIC WIRING

WARNING

Using the exclusive circuit, a person qualified for electrician shall work for the electric work in conformance with the regulations of the local electric company and the Installation

Manual.

If there is capacity shortage of the power circuit or incomplete electric work, a fire or electric shock is caused.

For cabling, use the specified cables and connect them securely so that external force of cable does not transmit to the terminal connecting section.

If connection or fixing is incomplete, a fire is caused.

Be sure to connect the earth wire.

Grounding work is necessary based upon a law. If the earth grounding is incomplete, an electric shock is caused.

Do not connect earth wire to gas pipe, lightning rod, or earth wire of telephone.

CAUTION

Be sure to attach an earth leakage breaker; otherwise an electric shock may be caused.

To Disconnect the Appliance from Main Power Supply.

This appliance must be connected to the main power supply by means of a switch with a contact separation of at least 3 mm.

REQUIREMENT

• Perform wiring of the power supply in conformance with the regulations of the local electric company.

• For wiring of power supply in the indoor unit, refer to the Installation Manual of each indoor unit.

• Never connect the 220–240V power to the terminal block (U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6) for control cables.

(Trouble is caused.)

• Arrange the cables so that the electric wires do not come to contact with high-temperature part of the pipe; otherwise coating melts and an accident may be caused.

• After connecting cable to the terminal block, take off the trap and then fix the cable with cable clamp.

• Store wiring system for control and refrigerant piping system in the same line.

• Do not turn on power of the indoor unit until vacuuming of the refrigerant pipe will finish.

• For cabling of the power supply of the indoor unit and the inter-unit cabling between indoor and outdoor units, refer to the Installation Manual of indoor unit.

95

9-1. Power Supply Specifications

• Power supply specifications of outdoor unit

Select the power supply cabling and fuse of outdoor unit from the following specifications:

Cable 5-core, in conformance with Design 60245 IEC 66

9-2. Electrical Wiring Design

• Do not connect them via the incorporated terminal block (L1, L2, L3, N).

Outdoor power supply

3-phase 380-415V, 50Hz

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N

3-phase

50Hz 380-415V

Earth leakage breaker hand switch

Earth

Outdoor power source

Indoor power source

Single phase

50Hz 220-240V

Earth leakage breaker power switch

FS unit

Pull box

FS unit FS unit FS unit

Indoor unit

FS unit

Indoor unit

FS unit

Indoor unit

FS unit

Indoor unit

FS unit

Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit

• Unit capacities and power supply wire sizes (Reference)

Model

MMY-

MAP0802FT8

MAP1002FT8

MAP1202FT8

Power supply wiring

Wire size

3.5 mm² (AWG #10) Max. 20 m

5.5 mm² (AWG #10) Max. 28 m

5.5 mm² (AWG #10) Max. 27 m

Field fuse

30 A

30 A

30 A

• Determine the wire size for indoor unit according to the number of connected indoor units downstream.

• Observe local regulation regarding wire size selection and installation.

96

9-3. Design of Control Wiring

Power supply

Single phase

220-240V 50Hz

(Open)

Earth

[Central remote controller] (Option)

TCB-SC642TLE (For line 64)

FS unit

Transmission wire for control between outdoor units

Transmission wire for control between outdoor unit and indoor unit

Connection of shield wire must be connected

(Connected to all connecting sections in each outdoor unit)

Connection of shield wire must be connected

(Connected to all connecting sections in each indoor unit)

Transmission wire for control between indoor and FS unit.

FS unit FS unit

(Header) (Follower)

Remote controller

FS unit

FS unit FS unit

Transmission wire for control between indoor and FS unit.

FS unit

• Wire specification, quantity, size of crossover wiring and remote controller wiring

Name Q’ty

Up to 500m

Size

Up to 1000m 1000 to 2000m

Specification

Crossover wiring

(indoor-indoor / indoor-outdoor / control wiring, central control wiring)

Remote controller wiring

2 cores 1.25mm² 2.0mm² Shield wire

2 cores 0.5 to 2.0mm² — — —

Control wiring between indoor and

FS unit

Be sure to use the attached connection cable (6m). If the length between indoor and FS unit exceeds 5 m, connect by using the connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE). (Sold separately)

(1) The crossover wiring and central control wiring use 2-core non-polarity transmission wires. Use 2-core shield wires to prevent noise trouble. In this case, close (connect) the end of shield wires, and perform the functional grounding for the end of the shield wires which are connected to both indoor and outdoor units. For the shield wires which are connected between the central remote controller and the outdoor unit, perform the functional grounding at only one end of central control wiring.

(2) Use 2-core and non-polarity wire for remote controller. (A, B terminals)

Use 2-core and non-polarity wire for wiring of group control. (A, B terminals)

97

NOTE

4 or more control wires connected to one terminal is prohibited.

Outdoor unit

U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6

Indoor unit

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

NOT

GOOD

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

Remote controller

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

NOTE

Loop wiring of control wires is prohibited.

Outdoor unit

U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6

Indoor unit

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

2m or more

Remote controller

1 2

A B

NOT

GOOD

Wiring which the transmission line is formed in loop is unavailable, Dotted line is forbidden

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

1 2

A B

98

• Specifications of cables for controlling

1. Connect each cable for controlling as shown below.

Header

A

Follower

B

Follower

C

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6

Shield wire earth

Control wiring between outdoor units

Control wiring between indoor and outdoor units

Shield wire indirect connection

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6

U3 and U4 terminals are used when a central control which connects each line is adopted.

Shield wire earth

• Power supply specifications of combined outdoor units

When a distribution panel is provided for each combined outdoor units as shown in the following figure, select the power supply wiring of the main trunk line (a) up to the distribution panel and fuse from the table below.

Header

Follower unit 1

Follower unit 2

Power supply unit

L

1

L

2

L

3

N

Main switch

(1)

Earth leakage breaker

(2)

Outdoor power supply

3-phase

380-415V 50Hz

(a)

Distribution panel

(a)

Distribution panel

Earth

(b)

L

1

L

2

L

3

N L

1

L

2

L

3

N

Heat Recovery model

MMY-AP1602FT8


Wire size

14 mm² (AWG #6) Max. 39 m

MMY-AP1802FT8

MMY-AP2002FT8

14 mm² (AWG #6) Max. 37 m

14 mm² (AWG #6) Max. 35 m

MMY-AP2402FT8

22 mm² (AWG #4) Max. 41 m

MMY-AP2602FT8

22 mm² (AWG #4) Max. 40 m

MMY-AP2802FT8

38 mm² (AWG #4) Max. 66 m

MMY-AP3002FT8

38 mm² (AWG #1) Max. 64 m

*

: Model name differs according to each wire manufacturer.

Field fuse

50 A

50 A

60 A

75 A

75 A

75 A

100 A

99

100

LRA FLA kW

9-4. For Indoor Unit Power Supply

(The outdoor unit has a separate power supply.)

Item

Model

All models of indoor units

FS unit


Wire size

2.0mm² (AWG#14) Max. 20m 3.5mm² (AWG#12) Max. 50m

Field fuse

15A

Be sure to use the attached cable (6m). If the length between indoor and FS unit exceeds

5m, connect by using the connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE). (Sold separately)

NOTE :

The connecting length indicated in the table represents the length from the pull box to the outdoor unit when the indoor units are connected in parallel for power, as shown in the illustration below. A voltage drop of no more than 2% is also assumed. If the connecting length will exceed the length indicated in the table, select the wire thickness in accordance with indoor wiring standards.

• Group Control through a Remote Controller

Group control of multiple indoor units (8 units) through a single remote controller switch

Indoor unit No.1

A B

No.2

A B

No.3

A B

No.4

A B

No.7

A B

No.8

A B

Remote controller

(A.B)

Indoor power source single phase 220–240V, 50Hz


Switch

FS unit

Pull box

FS unit FS unit FS unit

FS unit FS unit FS unit FS unit

CAUTION

(1) Keep the refrigerant piping system and the indoor-indoor/indoor-outdoor control wiring systems together.

(2) When running power wires and control wires parallel to each other, either run them through separate conduits, or maintain a suitable distance between them.

(Current capacity of power wires: 10A or less for 300mm, 50A or less for 500mm)

101

9-5. System Wiring Diagram

Power supply

3 phase 380-415V 50Hz


Power switch

Power supply

3 phase 380-415V 50Hz


Power switch

Power supply

3 phase 380-415V 50Hz


Power switch

Outdoor unit

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

U1 U2

Earth terminal U3 U4 U5 U6

Earth terminal U1 U2


Earth terminal U1 U2


Earth terminal

Outdoor side

U1/U3

U2/U4

Single phase

220-240V 50Hz

Central remote controller

Indoor side

U1/U2

Earth terminal

L N

Indoor unit

A

B

Remote controller

A

B

Control wiring

FS unit

CN02

CN01

Power line

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

Power supply

Single phase

220-240V

50Hz


Power switch

Pull

Box

U1/U2

Indoor unit

Earth terminal

A

B

Control wiring

Remote controller

A

B

FS unit

L N

CN81

CN02

CN01

Power line

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

Pull

Box

U1/U2

Earth terminal

L N

Indoor unit

A

B

Remote controller

A

B

Control wiring

FS unit

CN02

CN01

Power line

Earth terminal

Earth terminal

NOTE :

Control wire and power line wire between FS unit and indoor unit are the accessary parts of FS unit.

(Wire length : 6m)

If the length between indoor and FS unit exceeds 5m, connect by using the connection cable kit sold separately

(RBC-CBK15FE).

102

9-6. Connection of Power Supply Cable with Control Wire

Insert power supply cable and control wire after removing knockout of the piping/wiring panel at front side of the outdoor unit.

Knockout for power supply cable

Knockout for control wire

Piping/wiring panel

When insert power supply cable and control wire, protect power supply cable and control wire from edge after removing knockout.

1. Connect the power supply cables and earthing wire to the terminal block of the power supply through a notched section at side of the electric parts box, and fix with a clamp.

2. Bundle the power supply cables using the hole so that they are not out of the notched section of the electric parts box.

1. Connect the control wire between indoor and outdoor units and the control wire between outdoor units to

(U1, U2, U5, U6) terminal section through a hole at side of the electric parts box, and fix with a clamp.

2. Use the control wire with 2-core shield wire (1.25mm² or more) in order to prevent noise trouble. (Non-polarity)

NOTE :

1) Be sure to separate the power supply cables and each control cable.

2) Arrange the power supply cables and each control cable so that they do not contact with the bottom surface of the outdoor unit.

3) A terminal block (U3, U4 terminal blocks) for connecting an optional part “Central remote controller etc.” is provided on the inverter unit, so be careful to miswiring.

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6

U

1

-U

6

Terminal

U1-U2 : For control wiring between indoor/outdoor unit

( )

U5-U6 : For control wiring between outdoor units

Earth screw

Earth screw

L1 L2 L3 N

Power supply terminal block

L1 L2 L3 N

Earth screw

10mm or more

Earth line

Power supply cable

P.C. board

103

9-7. Electrical Wiring of Flow Selector Unit

Wire connections

Use the supplied, dedicated wires.

REQUIREMENT

• Check that power is not supplied to the indoor unit before connecting wires.

• For safety, connect wires to the Flow Selector unit first.

• Be sure to put wires through the wire connecting ports on the Flow Selector unit and the indoor unit.

Connection diagram

• Power is supplied from the connected indoor unit.

• Connect the attached wires (power supply / control wiring) between the Flow Selector unit and the indoor unit.

Connect wires as shown in the below figure.

Flow Selector Unit

Indoor Unit

Attached wire (power supply)

RBM-Y1802FE Only

Earth Screw

SVS SVS SVSS SVDD

SVD

1 1

1

1

3

3

CN01

(RED)

1

1

3

3

5

5

CN10

(WHI)

7

7

9

9

Control P.C. Bord for indoor unit

3 3

CN67

(BLK)

COM SVD SVS SVDD SVSS

WHI ORN

BLU YEL

BRW

Control P.C. Bord MCC-1431

CN02

(GRN)

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

5

4 5

CN81

(BLK)

R(L) S(N)

Power Supply

Single Phase

220-240V 50Hz

Indoor Unit

Earth Screw

RBM-Y1122FE/Y1802FE

Attached wire (control wiring)

Attached connection wire between indoor and FS unit can be used up to 5m in pipe length between indoor and

FS unit. When the pipe length between indoor and FS unit exceeds 5m, be sure to use the connection cable kit sold separately (RBC-CBK15FE).

Flow Selector unit

• Remove the fixing screws (4 parts) from the cover of the Flow Selector unit.

• Connect the connector (red) of the attached wire (power supply) to CN01 on the FS unit control P.C. board.

• Connect the ring terminal of the attached wire (power supply) to the earth screw.

• Connect the connector (green) of the attached wire (control wiring) to CN02 on the FS unit control P.C. board.

• Secure the two attached wires with the attached cord clamp.

(Be careful not to apply tension to the wires and connectors.)

• Check that the wires are not pinched, and then attach the cover.

Earth screw

Cord clamp (Control wiring)

Cord clamp

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Fixing screw (4 parts)

CN01 (Red)

CN02 (Green)

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Control P.C. board

104

Indoor unit

See also the Installation Manual supplied with the indoor unit.

• Remove the electrical parts box cover from the indoor unit.

• Connect the receptacle R(L) and S(N) on the attached wire (power supply) to a free on the R(L) and S(N) terminal block for power supply.

∗ When the indoor unit is the high wall or concealed duct high static pressure type, connect as follows.

Connect the wire to the lead wires with wire joint on the R(L) and S(N) terminal block for power supply, using the following procedure:

Cut the wire joint on each lead wire, and cut the receptacle R(L) and S(N) on the attached wire (power supply). Then check the R(L) and S(N) phases, and connect the wire and the lead wires with the attached wire joints.

• Connect the ring terminal of the attached wire (power supply) to the earth screw.

• Connect the connector (black) of the attached wire (control wiring) to CN081 on the Indoor P.C. board.

• Secure the two attached wires with the attached cord clamp.

(Be careful not to apply tension to the wires and connectors.)

• Check that the wires are not pinched, and then attach the cover.

4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (MMU-AP

✽✽

Indoor P.C. board

CN81

R(L), S(N) terminal block for power supply

Faston connection

Earth screw

R(L) S(N)

U1 U2 A B

Power supply

Attached wire (Control wiring)

Attached wire (Power supply)

Clamp with remote controller lead wires

105


✽✽1WH Series)

Power supply

Earth screw

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Indoor P.C. board

R(L)S(N)


FOR INTER-UNIT FOR REMOTE CONTROL

DON’T APPLY 220-240V

FOR AI-NET

Faston connection Earth screw

CN081(Black)


✽✽1SH Series)

Floor Standing Type (MMF-AP

✽✽1H Series)

Indoor P.C. board

Faston connection

Earth screw

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Cord clamp



R(L) S(N)

CN081

Cord clamp

Power supply


Attached wire

(Power supply)

Cord clamp

106


✽✽1YH Series)

CN081

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Earth screw

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Concealed Duct Standard Type (MMD-AP

✽✽1BH Series)

Indoor

P.C. board

R(L), S(L) terminal block for power supply

Corde clamp

Power supply

Indoor P.C. board

R(L), S(L) terminal block for power supply

Faston connection

CN081

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Earth screw

Cord clamp

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Power supply

107

Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type (MMD-AP


Indoor P.C. board Wire joint (Attached)

CN081

(Black)

Secure here.

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Earth screw

Connect to the lead wires

(red and white) on R(L) and S(N).

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Power supply


Under Ceiling Type (MMC-AP


Indoor P.C. board


Faston connection

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Cord clamp

CN081 (Black)



R(L) S(N)

Earth screw

Cord clamp

Power supply

Attached wire

(Power supply)

108

High Wall Type (MMK-AP

✽✽

Indoor P.C. board

Wire joint (Attached)

Earth screw for

Flow Selector unit

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Cord clamp

Attached wire

(Power supply)

CN081 (Black)

Power supply

Connect to the lead wires

(red and white) on

R(L) and S(N).

Earth screw

R(L) , S(N) terminal block for power supply

High Wall Type (MMK-AP

✽✽

For the Flow Selector unit that have power supply cord, connect a power supply cable to it as mentioned below.

1. Open the air inlet grille upward.

2. Remove the four screws securing the front panel.

3. Slightly open the lower part of the front panel then pull the upper part of the front panel toward you to remove it from the rear plate.

4. After removing the front panel, remove the wiring cover and the cord clamp.

5. Connect and secure the power supply cable of Flow Selector unit and secure the cord clamp.

6. The control wires are included in terminal block part of the power supply.

Take out the control wires outwards through the slit of the terminal block.

7. Fasten the wiring cover surely with screws.

8. Connect the control wire taken out through the slit on the terminal block and the control wire from the Flow

Selector unit at the relay terminal section.

Terminal block

Terminal block

Earth line

Cord clamp

Screw

Screw

Control wire

Control wire from the

Flow Selector unit

Slit of the terminal block

Power supply cable for Flow Selector unit

Wiring cover

Screw

109

Floor Standing Cabinet Type (MML-AP


Earth screw

Earth screw for FS unit

Indoor P.C. board CN081 (Black)

Attached wire

(Control wiring)

Cord clamp

Attached wire

(Power supply)


Faston connection

Floor Standing Concealed Type (MML-AP

✽✽1BH Series)

Indoor P.C. board

Faston connection

Earth screw



R(L) S(N)

CN081

Cord clamp

Attached wire

(Power supply)

Power supply

Earth screw


Attached wire

(Control wiring)

110

10. INDOOR UNIT TERMINAL BOARD PLACE-

MENT AND WIRING

Wiring the indoor unit

Be sure to connect wires matching the terminal numbers. Incorrect connection causes a trouble.

Treating of wire connecting port

Using the attached heat insulator, seal the wire connecting ports. Otherwise, a dewing may be caused.

Wiring of remote controller cord

A low-voltage circuit is used for the circuit of the remote controller.

It cannot be come to directly contact with wires of AC 220–415V for 50Hz, or also cannot be stored in the same conduit tube.

• For the remote controller cord, 2-core vinyl cab tire round cord (0.3mm²) can be used up to total length 200m, and the other (0.75mm²) can be used up to total length 500m.

• Connect wires matching symbols of the remote controller with A, B terminals of the terminal block. Never connect AC 220–240V, 380–415V for 50Hz power source. If doing so, a trouble is caused.

Wiring of ceiling panel

Mounting of the ceiling panel with auto louver

Following the Installation Manual for the ceiling panel, connect the connector (2P : Red) which is out of the ceiling panel in the electric parts box.

Cord clamp


R(L) S(N)

Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit cable/

Remote controller terminal block

U

1

U

2

A B

R

(L)

S

(N)

Cord clamp

Earth line

Connecting cable

111

Remote controller

A B

U

1

U

2

A B X Y

R(L) S(N)

Cord clamp


Cord clamp

Indoor unit power supply

Treating of wiring connecting port

Using the attached heat insulator, seal the connecting port of wiring. If sealing is not executed, dewing may be caused.

• As shown in the figure, seal the wire connecting port with attached heat insulator. If sealing is insufficient, dewing is caused in the electric parts box.

Wire connecting port

Adhered surface

Cord clamp

(For power supply)

Notched part



<SH type> <YH type>

Screw A

R(L) S(N)

R(L) S(N)

U

1

U

2

A B

U

1

U

2

A B

Wire

Screw B

C


FOR INTER-UNIT FOR REMOTE CONTROL FOR AI-NET

U1 U2 A B X Y

Wire

Cord clamp Terminal block Electric parts box

R

(L)

S

(N)

Earth screw

Electric parts box

Inter-unit wire

Power supply cable

Cable clamp

Earth screw

Cord clamp

112

Heat insulator

(Required at site)

Cable



Wiring to electric parts box

• Connect cables to the electric parts box as shown in the following figure

R(L) S(N)

U1 U1 A B

Notch

*

Notch

*

Pear shape hole

*

Hook it.

Loosen three screws ( * ) at both sides, and remove two screws, and take off the shield plate sliding

Remove two screws, and take off upper cover of the electric parts box from the hook.

Inter-unit cable between indoor

Cord clamp and outdoor units Remote controller wire

Power supply cable

(LN terminal)


(U1, U2 terminal)

Transmission line for control

(AB terminal)

Remote controller cabling



Control transmission line

• Be sure fix the cables from outside of indoor unit in the following figure

F

1

F

2

F

3

F

4

F

1

F

2

F

3

F

4

F

1

F

2

F

3

F

4

R(L) S(N)

U1 U2 A B

U1 U2 A B

<Intermediate unit>

<End unit>



113


R(L) S(N)

Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit wire/

Remote controller terminal block

U

1

U

2

A B

Cord clamp

Cord clamp


2P

R(L)

R(L)

S(N)

S(N)

Main P.C. board

U1 U2 A B X Y

Remote controller cable

Cord clamp

Cord clamp

Power supply cable

Inter-unit cable between indoor and outdoor units

114

Electric parts box

U

1

U

2

A B

R(L)S(N)

R(L) S(N)

Connector

Cord clamp

(For power supply)

Electric parts box

R(L) S(N)

R S

U

1

U

2

A B

Power cable

Cord clamp

115

NOTE :

Fix the cord clamp matching to the wire size.

L

L

N

N

U1 U2 A B

U1 U2 A B

R(L) S(N)

>

ABS

<

Cord clamp

Cord clamp

Remote controller cable

Power supply cable

10mm

L N

40mm

10mm

110mm

Screw

Connector cover

Terminal block

Notch

116

11. DRAIN PIPE INSTALLATION

11-1. Natural Draining

1. The drain pipe should have a downward slope of at least 1/100.

2. The drain pipe should be as short as possible, and routed so that air pockets will not form.

Downward slope (at least 1/100)

(a drop of 1cm per meter)

3. The horizontal run should be as short as possible. If it must be long, support it with hanging supports at the prescribed intervals (to prevent undulations in the pipe).

1.5m to 2m

Downward slope at least 1/100

Heat insulation

Support bracket Over another pipe

NOT GOOD

Trap

NOT GOOD

Nominal diameter

Support bracket interval

NOT GOOD

Do not leave the end of the drain hose in water.

Do not leave any undulations in the drain pipe.

Hard polyvinyl chloride pipe

25 to 40mm Within 1.5 to 2m

NOT GOOD

NOT GOOD

Do not let the drain pipe slope upwards.

CAUTION

1) The drain pipe should be at least as large as the size of the drain pipe connector on the indoor unit.

2) Insulate drain pipes completely.

Failure to insulate drain pipes will allow condensation to form.

Insulate the pipe and the connector on the indoor unit as well.

Insulation

Polyethylene foam with a thickness of 6mm

3) Make all connections completely.

(Especially when using polyvinyl chloride pipe, do not forget to apply the adhesive for hard polyvinyl chloride.)

11-2. Collective Drain Piping

1. Connections to a horizontal main pipe should be dropped in from above. Furthermore, use pipe with a nominal diameter of at least VP20 (VP30) for the collective drain pipe.

2. Limit as much as possible the number of units that drain into a collective pipe in order to keep the length of the horizontal main pipe to a minimum.

3. Do not connect models with a built-in drain pump and models that use gravity drains to the same horizontal pipe.

VP25 (Outer dia. : Ø32mm)

Use as long a pipe as possible (10cm)

VP30

(Outer dia. : Ø38mm)

Downward slope of at least 1/100

Extended bent stack

11-3. Selecting the Diameter for the Collective Pipe

Calculate the amount of drain water based on the number of indoor units that will be connected to the collective drain pipe, and select the pipe diameter accordingly.

Assume 2 liters/hour per horsepower for the amount of drain water produced by an indoor unit.

• The above table is for a horizontal pipe.

Nominal

30

40

50

Inner dia.

(mm)

31

40

51

Allowable volume

(Grading 1/100)

88 l /hr

175 l /hr

334 l /hr

117

11-4. Drain Trap

1. When a drain pipe is connected to an indoor unit that will create negative pressure (concealed duct high static pressure type), install a drain trap.

2. Install one drain trap for each indoor unit.

(A drain trap that is installed downstream of a junction of drain pipes from two or more indoor units will be ineffectual.)

3. Install a cleanout plug in the drain trap.

Plug

50mm

50mm

11-5. Drain Check

After the drain pipe has been fully installed, place water in the drain pan and confirm that the water drains properly.

1) 4-way air discharge cassette type (with built-in drain pump)

<When checking after all electrical work has been completed>

1. While the cooling operation is in action, remove the cover of the water supply opening as illustrated below and then use a water pump or other source to gradually add at least 1500 to 2000cc of water through the water supply opening.

Drain piping connecting port

Check the draining action of the system by listening for the sound of the drain pump.

If the drain pump sound changes from a continuous sound to an intermittent sound, the drain system is functioning normally.

2. After checking the system, re-attach the cover for the water supply opening.

Water supply port

<When checking before all electrical work has been completed>

1. Firstly, unplug the float switch connector (CN34, 3P Red) in the electronic components box in the indoor unit, and then supply single-phase 220/230/240V, 50Hz power to L and N power terminals in the electronic components box. Never apply the voltage to terminals A , B , U1 , U2 .

The drain pump will not run if the float switch is not disconnected.

Following the same procedure as when checking the system after the electrical work has been completed, check the draining action of the system by adding water through the water supply opening and then listening for the sound of the drain pump.

2. When the check of the drain system is completed, do not forget to restore the float switch CN34 connector to its original condition. Also re-attach the cover for the water supply opening.

4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type,

Concealed Duct Standard Type

2-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type

CN34

Single phase

220/230/240V, 50Hz

L N

White

Red

Black

Pull out connector CN34 (Red) from P.C. board.

Black

Remove

Float switch connector (CN34, 3P Red)

(Lead wire color : Black)

Electric parts box

118

2) 2-way air discharge cassette type (with built-in drain pump)


1. While the cooling operation is in action, remove the rubber bushing from the water supply opening as illustrated below and then use a water pump or other source to gradually add at least 1200 to

1500cc of water through the water supply opening.

Check the draining action of the system by listening for the sound of the drain pump. If the drain pump sound changes from a continuous sound to an intermittent sound, the drain system is functioning normally.

2. After checking the system, re-install the rubber bushing in the water supply opening, and attach the circular insulation provided to the bushing.

Water supply opening

3) Concealed duct standard type (with built-in drain pump)


1. While the cooling operation is in action, remove the cover of the water supply opening as illustrated below and then use a water pump or other source to gradually add at least 1500 to 2000cc of water through the water supply opening.

Check the draining action of the system by listening for the sound of the drain pump. If the drain pump sound changes from a continuous sound to an intermittent sound, the drain system is functioning normally.

2. After checking the system, re-attach the cover for the water supply opening.

Insert the end of hose up to the near of suction port of drain pump.

Service plate

4) Concealed duct high static pressure type

The concealed duct type and the concealed duct high static pressure type use gravity drains.

After the drain pipes have been installed, use a water pump or other source to place water in the drain pan, and then make sure that the water drains completely.

Check port

Electric parts box

Water supply pump

119

5) Under ceiling type

Remove the transport brackets before beginning work.

CAUTION

Insulate drain pipes completely, including the connections. Failure to insulate drain pipes will allow condensation to form.

Piping and Insulation

<Indoor unit>

Piping

Hard polyvinyl chloride pipe ; nominal dia. (inner dia.) : Ø20mm

Heat

Vesicant polyethylene :

insulator

Thickness ; 6mm or more

Heat insulator


Drain pan

Drain hose

(Unit side)

Adhesion for hard polyvinyl chloride pipe used

Piping methods

1. Installing drain pipe to rear

Fix the drain pipe holding plate with screws at the bottom of the rear knockout hole, and then secure the drain pipe in place with a nylon band.

Make sure that the nylon band’s link point is on the inner side of the unit (above the drain pipe holding plate). If only the drain pipe will be routed out the rear of the unit, use just the drain pipe knockout hole.

2. Installing drain pipe to the left or right

Install the drain pipe so that it is horizontal.

* When running the drain pipe out of the left side of the unit, open the knockout hole. Also move the drain hose from the right side to the left, and move the plug from the left side to the right. Use a blunt-tipped object to push the plug in all of the way to its base.

After piping work has been completed, use the insulation provided to seal all gaps around the knockout.

(Cut the insulation to the necessary shape.)

How to drill the rear knockout

Cut with metal saw.

Nylon band

(Accessory)

Knockout hole for rear taking out

Refrigerant piping

Drain pipe fixing plate

(Accessory)

Fixing screw *

Drain pipe

* (Use fixing screws

for transport metal.)

Knockout hole for drain pipe

Hole for right side

(left side) piping

*

Drain pipe

Plug

120

CAUTION

Tightly closing the nylon band will lessen the effectiveness of the insulation. Only tighten the nylon band to the extent that it does not change the shape of the insulation.

CAUTIONS

1. Because the drain is a gravity drain, make sure that the piping outside of the unit has a downward slope.

2. If the piping is installed as shown in the illustrations, it will not drain. Avoid these conditions.

3. Once piping installation is complete, remove the cover for the check hole located on the right side of the unit, add water to the drain pan through the check hole, and make sure that the water drains completely.

NOT GOOD

NOT GOOD

Drain pipe

Refrigerant pipe

Drain pipe

Cover for the check hole

Check hole

6) High wall type (1 series)

CAUTIONS

Install the drain pipe in accordance with the Installation Manual so that the water is drained completely, and insulate the pipes so that no condensation forms n them.

Improper pipe installation could result in water leaking indoors on furniture, etc.

REQUIREMENTS

• Insulate indoor drain pipes completely.

• Insulate the connection with the indoor unit.

Incomplete insulation could result in condensation forming.

• Make sure that the drain pipe slopes downwards at a rate of 1/100 or more, do not route the drain pipe over another pipe, and do not create a trap.

These can all cause unusual sounds.

• Do not apply undue force to the drain pipe connection.

121


Arrange for the following materials on site for the pipe installation and insulation work.

Piping

Heat insulator



Thickness ; 6mm


Heat insulator

• When extending the drain hose, make the connection as shown in the figure at right.

• Because the drain is a gravity drain, the pipes outside of the unit must have a downward slope.

• Once the piping work is complete, pour water in the drain pan and make sure that the water drains completely.

Drain pan

Drain hose

Adhesion for hard polyvinyl chloride pipe used

Indoor side

Outdoor side

Pipe hole

(Grading downward to outdoor side)

Pipe and Drain Hose Formation

The drain pipe can be routed out of the rear, left, or right side of the unit.

1. When routing the drain pipe out the left or right side, align the pipe and drain hose as shown in the figure.

Make sure that the hose does not stick out the rear of the unit.

2. When routing the pipe out the left side, attach the installation plate and then pull the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, and wiring through a hole made in the wall ahead of time in alignment with the position of the connections, make the connections to the rear of the unit, and then arrange the pipes, etc., as shown in the figure.

Tape

Pipe (Liquid side)

Pipe (Gas side)

Communication wires for control

Lower cabinet

Drain hose

122

7) Floor standing cabinet type

Piping


Heat


insulator

Thickness ; 6mm or more

1. Because the drain is a gravity drain, the pipes outside of the unit must have a downward slope.

2. Once the piping work is complete, pour water in the drain pan and make sure that the water drains completely.

8) Floor standing concealed type

Installation of accessories

Install the drain receiver (accessory) on the pipe side of the indoor unit.

Fan Fan motor

Drain pan



Cut the insulation, insert the protrusion on the drain receiver into the hole, and then install it by pushing it in the directions indicated by the arrows.

Drain receiver (accessory)

Drain receiver

Drain hose

Use adhesive for hard polyvinyl chloride pipe

Elbow


Insulation

CAUTIONS

1. Make sure that the drain pipe slopes downwards at a rate of 1/100 or more, do not route the drain pipe over another pipe, and do not create a trap.

2. Limit horizontal runs of drain pipe to no more than 20m (not including change in height). If a drain pipe is long, prevent undulations in the pipe by installing support brackets along the pipe. Never use an air escape pipe. The drain water may blow out of such a pipe.

3. If using a collective drain pipe, install a VP30 or equivalent pipe with a downward slope of at least 1/100.

Apply adequate insulation (at least 6mm of polyethylene foam) to the drain pipe, as in the case of a refrigerant pipe.

4. Once pipe installation is complete, pour water into the drain receiver and make sure that the water drains.

Check for leaks at the hose connection.

CAUTION

Sometimes, debris will accumulate in the drain receiver while installation work is in progress. Remove the strainer from the drain receiver and clean it.

After cleaning the strainer, replace it in the drain receiver.

Strainer

123

9) High wall type (2 series)

1. Run the drain hose sloped downwards.

NOTE

• Hole should be made at a slight downward slant on the outdoor side.

2. Put water in the drain pan and make sure that the water is drained out of doors.

3. When connecting extension drain hose, insulate the connecting part of extension drain hose with shield pipe.

Do not rise the drain hose.

Do not form the drain hose into a wavy shape.

GOOD NOT GOOD NOT GOOD NOT GOOD NOT GOOD

50 mm or more

Do not put the drain hose end into water.

Shield pipe

Do not put the drain hose end in the drainage ditch.

Extension drain hose

Drain hose

Inside the room

CAUTION

Arrange the drain pipe for proper drainage from the unit.

Improper drainage can result in dew- dropping.

This air conditioner has the structure designed to drain water collected from dew, which forms on the back of the indoor unit, to the drain pan.

Therefore, do not store the power cord and other parts at a height above the drain guide.

Space for pipes

Wall

Drain guide

124

11-6. Cautions Concerning High Drains

Observe the following cautions when installing a drain pipe to a drain that is higher than the unit.

1) Cautions on drain installation work

1. The unit must be installed horizontally.

2. The height to the drain outside the unit must be within the specified limit.

3. The rising pipe should be within 100mm of the drain.

4. The drain pipe must have a downward slope of at least 1/100.

(After installing the piping, adjust the unit in the vertical direction carefully.)

5. When using a collective pipe, the drain pipe must drop at least 100mm before it empties into the collective pipe.

6. Insulate the drain pipe completely.

2) Height of a high drain outside of the unit

Drain pump bult-in type

H h

Height of connection

Height of outlet on unit

Ceiling surface

L

Allowable height of drain-up outside of unit (Condition)

Type Indoor unit type

Position of main unit drain port

Allowable height of drain-up (From drain port of main unit)

4-way air discharge cassette type

MMU-AP

H


MMU-AP0071WH to 0301WH

Drain pump incorporated


MMU-AP481WH


MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH,

AP0241SH h = 210 mm

H = 348 mm h = 356 mm h = 160 mm


MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH,

AP0121YH

Concealed duct standard type

MMD-AP

BH h = 200 mm h

∗ = 280 mm

∗ From unit bottom surface

H = 640 mm

H = 160 mm

H = 160 mm

H = 340mm

H = 150 mm

H = 270 mm

L

300 mm or less

100 mm or less

100 mm or less

140 mm or less

100 mm or less

100 mm or less

125

12. ADJUSTMENT OF AIR DIRECTION

As the characteristics of air, cool air collects at lower levels, and hot air collects at higher levels.

CAUTION

Set the louver so that air blows out horizontally.

If cooling operation is performed with the louver blowing air downwards, the air outlet or surface of the louver will be wet with dew, and dewdrop may fall down.

[4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type]

• Use the discharge louver with horizontal set point.

• Use the discharge louver with downward set point.

• When using a panel with auto louver, the discharge louver operates automatically by pushing the louver operation switch.

Resulted from this, cooling/heating effect increases furthermore.

• The louver operation switch can be handled only while the operation lamp (Green) goes on.

• Stop the louver operation during defrost operation.

• When “LOUVER” “MANUAL” are displayed intermittently on the remote controller, and disappear after a while, the panel has no auto louver function.

2-way discharge or 3-way discharge can be selected according to the shape or arrangement of the room.

For details, consult with the dealer which you have purchased the air conditioner.


Use the discharge louver with horizontal set point.

Use the discharge louver with downward set point.

• When using a panel with auto louver, the discharge louver operates automatically by pushing the louver operation switch. This increases the cooling/heating effect.



• When “LOUVER” “MANUAL” are displayed intermittently on the remote controller, the panel has no auto louver function.

126


<Up/Down air direction adjustment>

Auto louver :

• When pushing LOUVER switch, the discharge louver operates automatically.

This increases the cooling/heating effect.



In cooling operation, use the discharge louver with horizontal set point so that cool air diffuses the whole room.

In heating operation, use the discharge louver with downward set point so that the hot air is spread to the floor.

<Left/Right air direction adjustment>

When you change the blowout direction to left/right, direct the vertical grille inside of the discharge louver to desired direction.

[Concealed Duct Type]

When using the discharge grille unit, adjust the air direction as follows.

* For providing the discharge grille locally, contact to the sales dealer.


In heating operation, use the discharge louver with downward set point so that the hot air is spread at the foot.

• When pushing LOUVER operation switch on the remote control, the discharge louver operates automatically. This increases the cooling/ heating effect.



• When “LOUVER” “MANUAL” are displayed intermittently on the remote controller, and disappear after a while, the panel has no auto louver function.

127

[Under Ceiling Type]


Auto louver :

• When pushing LOUVER operation switch on the remote controller, the discharge louver operates automatically. This increases the cooling/ heating effect.







[High Wall Type (1 series)]

The horizontal louver can operate automatically in order to increase the cooling/heating effect.


Auto louver :

• When pushing LOUVER operation switch on the remote controller, the discharge louver operates automatically.





REQUIREMENT

• If cooling operation is performed with the louver blowing air down-wards, the surface of the cabinet or discharge louver is wet with dew, and dewdrop may fall down.

• When heating operation is performed with horizontal set point, unevenness of the room temperature may become large.

• Do not handle the discharge louver directly with hands. Select direction of the discharge louver by the

LOUVER operation switch on the remote controller. The discharge louver does not stop immediately even if the switch has been pushed. Push the switch adjusting the stop position.

128



[Floor Standing Cabinet Type]

In cooling operation, use the discharge louver with upward set point so that cool air diffuses the whole room.


How to change discharge port

To change the discharge port, follow the procedure below.

1. Remove two fixing screws from the discharge port.

(Fixing screws will be reused.)

2. Insert the hands into the discharge port, push up the rear side a little, and then remove the discharge port from the rear clip.

3. Lift the discharge port upward, and remove it.

4. Reverse the discharge port, and install it to the main unit.

(For installation, be sure to hang it on clips at two rear positions and two lower positions.)

5. Be sure to fasten the discharge port with the removed fixing screws so that the discharge port is not out of place.

129

[High Wall Type (2 series)]

• Adjust the air flow direction properly. Otherwise, it might cause discomfort and make the room temperature uneven.

• Adjust the vertical air flow using the remote control.

• Adjust the horizontal air flow manually.

Adjust the vertical air flow

The air conditioner automatically adjusts the vertical air flow direction in accordance with the operating conditions when AUTO or A mode is selected.

To set the air flow direction you desire

Perform this function when the air conditioner is in operation.

c FIX button

Keep pressing or pressing briefly the FIX button on the remote control to move the flap in the desired direction.

• In subsequent operations, the vertical air flow is automatically set in the direction to which you adjusted the flap using the FIX button.

NOTE

Operating angle of vertical airflow flap will be different during cooling, dry and heating operation.

To automatically swing the air flow direction

Perform this function when the air conditioner is in operation.

c SWING button

Press the SWING button on the remote control.

• To stop the function, press the SWING button.

CAUTION

• The FIX and SWING buttons will be disabled when the air conditioner is not in operation (including when the ON TIMER is set).

• Do not operate the air conditioner for long hours with the air flow direction set downward during the cooling or dry operation.

Otherwise, condensation may occur on the surface of the vertical air flow flap and cause dew dripping.

• Do not move the vertical air flow flap manually. Always use the FIX button.

If you move the flap manually, it may malfunction during operation.

If the flap malfunctions, stop the air conditioner once, and restart.

• When the air conditioner is started immediately after it was stopped, the vertical air flow flap might not move for 10 seconds or so.

• Flap operation is limited when performing group control.

Adjust the horizontal air flow

Preparation:

• Take hold of the lever on the horizontal air flow flap and move them to adjust the air flow direction as required.

• You can adjust the air flow at the left and right locations of the flap.

130

PRESET

START/STOP

FAN MODE AUTO

SWING

FIX

ECO

TIMER

Hi-POWER

MEMO

ON OFF

FILTER

SET CLR

RESET CLOCK CHECK

PRESET

START/STOP

FAN MODE AUTO

SWING

FIX

ECO

TIMER

Hi-POWER

MEMO

ON OFF

FILTER

SET CLR

RESET CLOCK CHECK

13. APPLIED CONTROL

13-1. Setup of Selecting Function in Indoor Unit

(Be sure to Execute Setup by a Wired Remote Controller)

<Procedure> Execute the setup operation while the unit stops.

4

5

6

1

SET CL

UNIT

3

2

1

Push

SET

,

CL

, and buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header indoor unit address in the group control.

In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.

2

Every pushing

UNIT

button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are successively displayed. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit only is turned on.

3

Specify the item code (DN) using the setup temperature

4

Select the setup data using the timer time and buttons.

and buttons.

(When selecting the DN code to “33”, change the temperature indication of the unit from

“°C” to “°F” on the remote controller.)

5

Push

SET

button. (OK if display goes on.)

• To change the selected indoor unit, return to procedure

2

.

• To change the item to be set up, return to procedure

3

.

6

Pushing button returns the status to normal stop status.

CAUTION

Be sure to perform the item code (DN) setting as the “Cooling Only” for the cooling only indoor unit.

(DN number = “OFF”)

If this setting is not performed, error code [L18] may occur.

131

Table: Function selecting item numbers (DN)

(Items necessary to perform the applied control at the local site are described.)

11

12

13

14

DN

01

02

03

04

06

0d

0E

0F

10

19

1E

28

29

2A

2E

30

31

32

33

40

5d

60

62

92

Item

Filter sign lighting time

0000 : None

0002 : 2500H

0004 : 10000H

0000 : Standard

Description

0001 : 150H

0003 : 5000H

Dirty state of filter

0001 : No.1 unit

0099 : Unfixed

0000 : No priority

0001 : High degree of dirt

(Half of standard time)

0064 : No.64 unit Central control address

Specific indoor unit priority

Heating temp shift to

0001 : Priority

Existence of automatic cool/heat mode

Plural indoor units control by one FS unit

Cooling only

0000 : No shift

0002 : +2°C

0000 : Provided

0000 : Usual to

0001 : +1°C

0010 : +10°C

(Up to +6 recommended)

0001 : Not provided

(Automatic selection from connected outdoor unit)

0001 : Group control

Type

Indoor unit capacity

Line address

Indoor unit address

Group address

0000 : Heat pump 0001 : Cooling only

(No display of [AUTO] [HEAT])

0000 : (1-way air discharge cassette)

0001 : (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037

0000 : Unfixed

0001 : No.1 unit

0001 : No.1 unit to to

0000 : Individual

0002 : Follower unit of group

0001 to 0034

0030 : No.30 unit

0064 : No.64 unit

0001 : Header unit of group

0000 : Not provided 0001 : Swing only

0004 : [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type]

Flap type

(Adjustment of air direction)

Temp difference of automatic cooling/ heating mode selection COOL

→

HEAT, HEAT

→COOL

Automatic restart of power failure

Operation condition of humidifier

Selection of option/ error input (CN70)

HA terminal (CN61) select

Automatic elevating grille

0000 : 0 deg

0000 : None to 0010 : 10 deg

(For setup temperature, reversal of COOL/HEAT by ± (Data value)/2)

0001 : Restart

0000 : Usual 0001 : Condition ignored

(Detection control for heat exchanger temperature)

0000 : Filter input

0002 : Humidifier input

0000 : Usual

0001 : Alarm input (Air washer, etc.)

0001 : Leaving-ON prevention control

0000 : Unavailable

(Standard,

Oil guard panel)

0000 : Unavailable

0001 : Available

(Auto grille, Oil guard,

Auto grille panel)

0001 : Available Ventilating fan control

TA sensor selection

Temperature unit select

Control for humidifier

(+ drain pump control)

0000 : Body TA sensor

0000 : °C (at factory shipment)

0001 : Remote controller sensor

0001 : °F

High ceiling selection

(Air volume selection)

0000 : None 0001 : Humidifier + Vaporizing system

(Pump ON)

0002 : Humidifier + Ultrasonic system

(Pump ON after specified time passed) (Unused)

0003 : Humidifier + Natural drain system (Pump OFF)

[4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type]

0000 : Standard filter

0001 : Super-long life

[Concealed Duct Standard type]

0000 : Standard static pressure 0001 : High static pressure 1

(40Pa)

0003 : High static pressure 2

(100Pa)

(70Pa)

0005 : Correspond to quiet sound

0006 : Low static pressure (20Pa)

0000 : Available (Operable) 0001 : Unavailable (Operation prohibited) Timer set

(Wired remote controller)

Smudging-proof control clear

Outside interlock release condition

0000 : Clear

0000 : Operation stop 0001 : Release communication signal receive

132

At shipment

According to type

0000 : Standard

0099 : Unfixed

0000 : No priority

0002 : +2°C

(Floor type 0000: 0°C)

0001 : Not provided

0099 : Unfixed

0000 : Heat pump

According to model type

According to capacity type

0099 : Unfixed

0099 : Unfixed

0099 : Unfixed

According to type

0003 : 3 deg

(Ts±1.5)

0000 : None

0000 : Usual

0002 : Humidifier

0000 : Usual

(HA terminal)

0000 : Unavailable

0000 : Unavailable

0000 : Body TA sensor

0000 : °C

0003 : Humidifier ON,

Pump OFF

0000 : Standard

0000 : Available

4- way Air Discharge

Cassette type only

0000 : Operation stop

Preliminary

13-2. Setting for plural indoor units control by one FS unit.

• Maximum 8 indoor units can be connected to one FS unit.

• Ensure that one main wired remote controller is connected in one group control.

• Setting of group address (Item code = 14) and plural indoor unit control (Item code = 0E) are necessary.

• Control wire for FS unit and main wired remote controller shall be connected to header indoor unit which group address is “1”.

When two or more indoor units are connected to one FS units, Item code setting is required.

Be sure to perform the following procedure after address setting.

FS unit

Control wiring

(Main BUS)

Refrigerant

Piping

Control wiring between indoor and FS unit

Header Follower Follower Follower Indoor unit

Remote controller

Plural indoor unit control

Group Address

DN=0E

DN=14

0

→ 1

1

0

→ 1

Group control

0

→ 1

2 2

0

→ 1

2

How to set up DN=“ ”

1

Push + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

• Unit No is displayed.

• The fans of all the indoor units in a group control are turned on.

2

Using the setup temp. / buttons, select as the item code.

3

Using the timer time / buttons, set to the item code.

4

Push

SET

button.

5

Pushing button returns the status to normal stop status.

SET DATA

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

CODE No.

1

5

SET CL

UNIT

3

2

4

For the setup of group address, refer to “Manual address setup from remote controller” of “14. address setup”.

133

13-3. Applied Control in Outdoor Unit

The following functions become available by setting the switches on the outdoor interface P.C. board.

No.

1

Function

Outdoor fan high static pressure shift

Switch No.

SW10

Bit

2

<Interface P.C. board of outdoor unit>

<Switch position magnified drawing>

SW11

Bit 1 Bit 2

For setup of cooling priority, heating priority control

SW10

Bit 2

For setup of outdoor fan high static pressure shift

Outdoor fan High Static Pressure Shift

This function is set when connecting a duct to discharge port of the outdoor unit.

Turn “Bit 2” of the Dip switch [SW10] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to ON side. For the outdoor units which are connected with the ducts, set this function regardless of the header unit or follower unit.

Increase No. of rotations of the propeller fan of the outdoor fan so that a duct with the maximum external static pressure 35Pa can be installed. If installing a discharge duct (Below 35Pa (3.5mmAq)) exceeding the duct resistance 15Pa, execute this setup.

Discharge air volume in each outdoor unit is described in the following table.

Capacity rank (MMY-MAP)

Standard air volume of outdoor unit (m³/min.)

0802 type

165

1002, 1202 type

175

35Pa or more as the external static pressure is also available. (Ex. 45Pa)

For details of adjustment, consult the sales subsidiary.

134

14. ADDRESS SETUP

In this air conditioner, it is necessary to set up the indoor address before starting the operation. Set up the address in the following procedure.

CAUTION

1. Set up address after wiring work.

2. Be sure to turn on the power in order of indoor unit

→ outdoor unit. If turning on the power in the reverse order, a check code [E19] is output. When a check code is output, turn on the power again.

3. It requires maximum 10 minutes (Usually, approx. 5 minutes) to set up automatically an address to 1 system.

4. To set up an address automatically, the setup at outdoor side is necessary.

(Address setup cannot be performed by power-ON only.)

5. To set up an address, it is unnecessary to operate the air conditioner.

6. Manual address setup is also available besides automatic setup.

Automatic address : Setup from SW15 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit

Manual address : Setup from the wired remote controller

* It is temporarily necessary to set the indoor unit and wired to 1 : 1.

(In group operation and in time without remote controller)

1. Automatic Address Setup

Without central control : To the address setup procedure 1

With central control : To the address setup procedure 2

(However, go to the procedure 1 when the central control is performed in a single refrigerant system.)

(Example)

Address setup procedure

Wire systematic diagram

In case of central control in a single refrigerant system

To procedure 1

In case of central control over refrigerant systems

To procedure 2

Outdoor


Outdoor


Outdoor Outdoor


Indoor Indoor

Remote controller

Remote controller

Indoor Indoor

Remote controller

Address setup procedure 1

c

Turn on power of indoor/outdoor units.

(In order of indoor

→ d

After approx. 1 minute, check that U. 1. L08 (U. 1. flash) is displayed in 7-segment display section on the interface

P.C. board of the header outdoor unit.

e

Push SW15 and start setup the automatic address.

(Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes)) f

When the count Auto 1

→ Auto 2 → Auto 3 is displayed in 7-segment display section, and it changes from

U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to

U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the setup finished.

g

When perform a central control, connect a relay connector between [U1U2] of the header outdoor unit and [U3U4] terminals.

Indoor Indoor

Remote controller

Remote controller

Indoor Indoor

Remote controller

Outdoor unit interface P.C. board

3

SW04 SW05 SW15

2 4

D600 D601 D602 D603 D604

SW01

1

SW02 SW03

1 1

5

U1 U2 U3 U4

For internal wiring between indoor and outdoor

For wiring of central control system

U5 U6

For internal wiring between outdoor units

135

REQUIREMENT

• When a group control is performed over the multiple refrigerant systems, be sure to turn on the power supplies of all the indoor units connected in a group in the time of address setup.

• If turning on the power for each refrigerant system to set up address, a header indoor unit is set for each system. Therefore, an alarm code

“L03” (Duplicated header indoor units) is output in operation after address setup. In this case, change the group address from the wired remote controller so that only one header indoor unit is set up.

(Example)

Wire systematic diagram

Group control over multiple refrigerant systems

Outdoor Outdoor

Header

Indoor

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Remote controller

Address setup procedure 2

c

Using SW13 and 14 on the interface P.C. board of the header outdoor unit in each system, set up the system address for each system.

(At shipment from factory: Set to Address 1)

Note) Be careful not to duplicate with other refrigerant system or other line (system) address.

Line (System) address switch on outdoor interface P.C. board

Outdoor unit interface P.C. board

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

SW11

ON

1 2 3 4

SW12

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1

SW13

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14

ON

1 2 3 4

SW06

(

SW07 SW08 SW09 SW10

{

: Switch ON,

×

: Switch OFF)

Line address

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

10

11

12

13

14

1 2

SW13

3

SW14

4 1 2 3 4

× × × × ×

× { × × ×

× × { × ×

×

{ {

× ×

× × × { ×

× { × { ×

× × { { ×

× { { { ×

× × × × {

× { × × {

× × { × {

× { { × {

× × × { {

× { × { {

Line address

19

20

21

22

23

15

16

17

18

24

25

26

27

28

1 2

SW13

3

SW14

4 1 2 3 4

× × { { {

× { { { {

{ ×

{ {

×

×

×

×

×

×

{ × { × ×

{ { {

{ × ×

×

{

×

×

{ {

{ ×

×

{

{

{

×

×

{ { { {

{ × × ×

×

{

{ { × × {

{ × {

{ { {

×

×

{

{

: Is not used for setup of line (system) address. (Do not change setup.) d

Check that the relay connectors between [U1U2] and [U3U4] terminals are come out in all the header outdoor units to which the central control is connected. (At shipment from factory: No connection of connector) e

Turn on power of indoor/outdoor.

(In order of indoor

→ f

After approx. 1 minute, check that 7-segment display is

U.1.L08 (U.1. flash) on the interface P.C. board of the header outdoor unit.

g

Push SW15 and start setup the automatic address.

(Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes)) h

When the count Auto 1

→ played in 7-segment display section, and it changes from

U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the setup finished.

i

Procedure f

to h

are repeated in other refrigerant systems.

2

U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6

For internal wiring between indoor and outdoor

For wiring of central control system

For internal wiring between outdoor units

136

j

When address setup has finished in all the systems, turn off SW30-2 on the interface P.C. boards of the header outdoor units of the systems connected to the identical central control except a system with least address number.

(The end terminal resistances of the wires in the central control system of indoor/outdoor are unified.) k

Connect the relay connector between [U1U2] and

[U3U4] of the header outdoor unit for each refrigerant system.

l

Then set up the central control address.

(For the central control address setup, refer to the

Installation manual of the central control devices.)

Header unit interface P.C. board

ON

1 2

SW30

SW30

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

SW11

ON

1 2 3 4

SW12

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1

SW13

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14

ON

1 2 3 4

SW06 SW07 SW08 SW09 SW10

SW15

SW04 SW05 SW15

7-segment display

D600 D601 D602 D603 D604

SW01

1

SW02 SW03

1 1

Switch setup

(Example in case of central control over refrigerant systems)

Outdoor side (Manual setup)

* Manual setup is necessary for column of which letter color is reversed.

Outdoor interface

P.C. board

SW13, 14

(Line address)

SW30-2

End terminal resistance of

indoor/outdoor communi

cation line/central control

communication line

Header unit

1

ON

Follower unit

(Setup is unnecessary.)


Header unit

2

OFF after address setup

Follower unit



Relay connector

Short after address setup

Open


Open

Header unit

3

OFF after address setup


Setup at shipment from factory

1

ON

Open

Header unit

U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4

Header unit

U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4

Header unit

U3 U4

Relay connector

U1 U2 U5 U6

U1 U2

A B

U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6

U1 U2

A B

Relay connector

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

Group

Remote controller

Individual

Remote controller

Indoor side (Automatic setup)

Line address

Indoor unit address

Group address

1

1

0

1

2

0

2

1

1

U1 U2 U5 U6

U1 U2

A B

U1 U2 U5 U6

Relay connector

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

2

2

2

3

1

0

CAUTION

For relay connector

Never connect a relay connector until address setup for all the refrigerant lines finishes; otherwise address cannot be correctly set up.

137

2. Manual address setup from remote controller

In case to decide an address of the indoor unit prior to finish of indoor electric wiring work and unpracticed outdoor electric wiring work (Manual setup from wired remote controller)

Arrange indoor unit in which address is set up and the wired remote controller to 1 : 1.

(Cabling example in 2 systems)

System 1

Outdoor

System 2

Turn on the power.

1

Push simultaneously

SET

+

CL

+ buttons for 4 seconds or more.

LCD changes to flashing.

(Line address)

→

2

Using the setup temp. / buttons, set to the item code.

Indoor

3

Using the timer time / buttons, set up the line address.

Remote controller

Header

Line address

→ 1

Indoor address

→ 1

Group address

→ 1

1

2

2

Follower

1

3

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

(Match it with the line address on the interface P.C.

board of the header unit in the identical refrigerant system.)

4

Push

SET

button.

(OK when display goes on.)

(Indoor address)

→

5


In the above example, under condition of no inter-unit wire of the wired remote controller, set the address after individual connecting of the wired remote controller.

6

Using the timer time up the indoor address.

/ buttons, set

(Group address)

→

Group address

Individual : 0000

Header indoor unit : 0001

Follower indoor unit : 0002

}

In case of group control

7

Push

SET

button.


8


9

Using the timer time

Individual =

Follower unit =

/ buttons, set

, Header unit =

.

,

Operation procedure

1

→

2

→

3

→

4

→

5

→

6

→

7

→

8

→

9

→

10

→

11

End

10

Push

SET

button.


11

Push button.

Setup operation finished.

(Status returns to normal stop status.)

Data

11

1

4, 7, 10

SET DATA

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

CODE No.

SET CL

UNIT

Item code

3, 6, 9

2, 5, 8

138

Note 1)

When setting the line address from the wired remote controller, do not use address 29 and 30.

The address 29 and 30 cannot be set up in the outdoor unit. Therefore if they are incorrectly set up, a check code

[E04] (Indoor/outdoor communication circuit error) is output.

Note 2)

When manual address has been set up from the wired remote controller, set up the following items for header outdoor unit of each system if performing a central control over refrigerant systems.

• Using SW13 and 14 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit in each system, set up the line address for each system.

• Turn off SW30-2 on the interface P.C. boards of the header outdoor units of the systems connected to the identical central control except a system with least line address number.

(The terminator resistor of the cables in the central control system of indoor/outdoor are unified.)

• Connect the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4] of the header outdoor unit for each refrigerant system.

• Then set up the central control address.

(For the central control address setup, refer to the Installation manual of the central control devices.)

3. Confirmation of indoor address and the main unit position on the remote controller

[Confirmation of indoor unit No. and position]

1. When you want to know the indoor address though position of the indoor unit itself can be recognized;

• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : Indoor unit = 1 : 1) or group control

<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner operates)

1

If it stops, push

2

Push

UNIT

button.

button.

The unit NO is displayed on the LCD. (Disappears after several seconds) The displayed unit No indicates the line address and indoor address. (If there is other indoor unit connected to the same remote controller

(Group control unit), other unit No is displayed every pushing

UNIT

button.)

1

Operate

UNIT No.

SET CL

UNIT


1 2

2

139

2. When you want to know position of the indoor unit using the address

• To confirm the unit numbers in a group control;

<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner stops)

The indoor unit numbers in a group control are successively displayed, and the corresponding indoor fan is turned on.

1

Push + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

• Unit No is displayed.

• The fans of all the indoor units in a group control are turned on.

2

Every pushing

UNIT

button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are successively displayed.

• The firstly displayed unit No. on number indicates the address of the header indoor unit.

• Only fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.

3

Push button to finish the procedure.

All the indoor units in group control stop.

3

End

1

SET DATA

SET CL

UNIT No.

R.C. No.

UNIT

CODE No.


1 2 3

End

2

• To confirm all the unit numbers from an arbitrary wired remote controller;

<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner stops)

The indoor unit No. and position in the same refrigerant system can be confirmed. An outdoor unit is selected, the indoor unit numbers in the same refrigerant system are successively displayed, and then its indoor unit fan is turned on.

1

Push the timer time + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

Firstly, the line 1, item code (Address Change) is displayed. (Select outdoor unit.)

2

Using

UNIT

+ buttons, select the line address.

3

Using

SET

button, determine the selected line address.

SET DATA

UNIT No.

CODE No.

• The indoor address, which is connected to the refrigerant system of the selected outdoor unit is displayed and the fan is turned on.

4

Every pushing

UNIT

button, the indoor unit numbers in the same refrigerant system are successively displayed.

• Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates.

6

1

SET CL

R.C. No.

UNIT

[To select another line address]

5

Push

CL

button to return to procedure

2

.

• The indoor address of another refrigerant system can be successively confirmed.

6


3


1 2 3

4 5 6

End

4

2

5

140

4. Address setup example (VRF system)

[Automatic address / Manual address setup example]

Individual control

Automatic address setting Available

1

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor

RC RC

Master Master

Outdoor

Indoor

Available

1

Indoor

RC

1

Master

RC

2

Side

RC

3

Master

RC

4

Side

Indoor Indoor unit address 1 2 1 2

Automatic address setting

Wireless

RC

Available

Outdoor

1

Indoor Indoor

Receiver unit

Master Master

Indoor

Available

1

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor

Receiver unit

Master Master

Wireless

RC

1 2 3 4

* RC: Remote Controller

Available

1

Outdoor

Indoor

RC

Master

Side

Indoor

RC

Master

Side

141

Group control


Indoor

Indoor Indoor

RC

Master

Available

1

Outdoor

Central control (Multiple refrigerant systems)

Automatic address setting Available


Outdoor

Individual control

Indoor Indoor

Outdoor

Individual control

Indoor Indoor

RC RC

Master Master

RC

Master

RC

Master

Indoor

Available

1

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor

Receiver unit

Wireless

RC


RC

Master

Available

Available

1

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor

RC

Master

Outdoor

Group control

Indoor Indoor

Outdoor

Group control

Indoor Indoor

RC

Master

Receiver unit

(Side)

Wireless

RC

142

Group control over other refrigerant systems


1

Outdoor

Indoor

RC

Master

Indoor

Outdoor

Indoor

Indoor

Available

2

Indoor Indoor

Outdoor

Indoor

1

Indoor

*1 In case of group control over refrigerant systems, automatic address setting is available only when all indoor units connected to a group control are turned on during address setting.

If an automatic address setting is conducted under condition of power-ON only in the refrigerant system in which address set up, it will cause the error code “L03” (Duplicated header indoor units) because header indoor units exit for each refrigerant system. In this case, change the group address by the wired remote controller so that only one indoor unit becomes the header unit in one group control.

1 2 1

→ 2∗ 2

→ It is necessary to change the group address as marked with ∗ when an automatic address setting is conducted under condition of power-ON only in the refrigerant system in which address set up.


1

Available

2 1

Outdoor

Indoor

RC

Master

Wireless

RC

Indoor

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Outdoor

Indoor Indoor

Indoor

*1 In case of group control over refrigerant systems, automatic address setting is available only when all indoor units connected to a group control are turned on during address setting.

If an automatic address setting is conducted under condition of power-ON only in the refrigerant system in which address set up, it will cause the error code “L03” (Duplicated header indoor units) because header indoor units exit for each refrigerant system. In this case, change the group address by the wired remote controller so that only one indoor unit becomes the header unit in one group control.

1 2 1

→ 2∗ 2

→ It is necessary to change the group address as marked with ∗ when an automatic address setting is conducted under condition of power-ON only in the refrigerant system in which address set up.

143

5. Change of indoor address from wired remote controller

• To change the indoor address in individual operation (Wired remote controller : Indoor unit = 1 : 1) or

group control (When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.)

<Procedure> (Operation while air conditioner stops)

1

Push simultaneously

SET

+

CL

+ buttons for 4 seconds or more.

(The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header indoor unit in group control.)

2

In group control, select an indoor unit No to be changed by

UNIT

button.

(The fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.)

3


4

Using the timer time / buttons, change the displayed setup data to a data which you want to change.

5

Push

SET

button.

6

Using the

UNIT

button, select the unit No. to be changed at the next time.

Repeat the procedure

4

to

6

and change the indoor address so that it is not duplicated.

7

After the above change, push

UNIT

button to confirm the changed contents.

8

If it is acceptable, push button to finish confirmation.

CODE No.

SET DATA

UNIT No.

R.C. No.

4

8

1

SET CL

UNIT

2, 6, 7

3

5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

End

144

• To change all the indoor addresses from an arbitrary wired remote controller;

(When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.)

Contents : Using an arbitrary wired remote controller, the indoor unit address can be changed for each same refrigerant cycle system

∗∗∗∗∗ Change the address in the address check/change mode.

<Procedure> (Operation while air conditioner stops)

1

Push the timer time + buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

Firstly, the line 1, item code (Address Change) is displayed.

2

Using

UNIT

+ buttons, select the line address.

3

Push

SET

button.

• The indoor address, which is connected to the refrigerant system of the selected outdoor unit is displayed and the fan is turned on.

First the current indoor address is displayed on the setup data. (Line address is not displayed.)

4

The indoor address of the setup data moves up/down by the timer time / buttons.

Change the setup data to a new address.

5

Push

SET

button to determine the setup data.

6

Every pushing

UNIT

button, the indoor unit numbers in the same refrigerant system are successively displayed. Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates.

Repeat the procedure

4

to

6

and change all the indoor addresses so that they are not duplicated.

7

Push

SET

button.

(All the displays on LCD go on.)

8


1

3

SET DATA

UNIT No.

R.C. No.

CODE No.

SET CL

UNIT

Cancel of line selection

2

Here, if the unit No. is not called up, the outdoor unit in this system does not exist.

Push

CL

button, and then select a line according to procedure

2

.

CODE No.

SET DATA

UNIT No.

R.C. No.

4

8

6

UNIT

SET CL

5, 7

To finish the setup


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

End

145

6.

Clearance of address (Return to status (Address undecided) at shipment from factory)

Method 1

An address is individually cleared from a wired remote controller.

“0099” is set up to line address, indoor address, and group address data from the wired remote controller.

(For the setup procedure, refer to the above-mentioned address setup from the wired remote controller.)

Method 2

Clear the indoor addresses in the same refrigerant line from the outdoor unit.

1. Turn off the power of the refrigerant line to be returned to the status at shipment from factory, and change the header unit to the following status.

1) Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4].

(If it has been already removed, leave it as it is.)

2) Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit if it is ON.

(If it has been already ON, leave it as it is.)

Disconnect

Header unit

U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6

U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6

U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6

Central control device

U1

U3

U2

U4

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

U1 U2

A B

U1 U2

A B

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

Remote controller

Unit of which address is to be returned to the initial status

2. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be cleared. After approx. 1 minute, check that

“U.1. - - -” is displayed, and then execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit of which address is to be cleared in the refrigerant cycle line.

SW01 SW02 SW03

2

2

1

2

2

2

SW04

After checking that “A.d.buS” is displayed on 7-degment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

After checking that “A.d.nEt” is displayed on 7-degment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

Address which can be cleared

Line + Indoor + Group address

Central address

3. After “A.d. c.L.” has been displayed on 7-degment display, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/1/1.

4. When the address clearing has correctly finished, “U.1.L08” is displayed on 7-degment display after a while.

If “A.d. n.G.” is displayed on 7-degment display, there is a possibility which is connected with the other refrigerant cycle line. Check again the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4] terminals.

NOTE) Be careful that the other refrigerant cycle line address may be also cleared if clearing operation is not correctly executed.

5. After clearing of the address, set up an address again.

146

7. In case of increase the address-undefined indoor units (Extension, etc.)

If set up the indoor address of which address is undefined accompanied with extension of indoor units, replacement of P.C. board, etc, follow to the methods below.

Method 1

Set up an address individually from a wired remote controller.

(Line address, Indoor address, Group address, Central address)

For the setup method, refer to the above “Manual address setup from remote controller”.

Method 2

Set up an address from the outdoor unit.

∗ Leave the address of the unit of which address has been already set up as it is.

Set up an address only to the unit of which address is undefined.

The addresses are allocated from the low number.

Setup procedure

Arrange the outdoor header units in the refrigerant line to which indoor units are added. (Figure below)

1. Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4].

2. Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board at outdoor header unit side if it is ON.

∗ Turn off the power, and then execute the operation.

Disconnect

Central control device

U1

U3

U2

U4

Header unit

U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4 U3 U4

Follower unit

U3 U4 U3 U4

U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6 U1 U2 U5 U6

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

Added indoor unit

U1 U2

A B

U1 U2

A B

Remote controller

3. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be set up. After approx. 1 minute, check that

“U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display.

4. Execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.

SW01 SW02 SW03

2 14 2

SW04

After checking that “In.At” is displayed on 7-segment display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.

“AUTO1”

→ “AUTO2” → “AUTO3” … is counted and displayed on 7-degment display.

5. When “U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display, the setup operation finished.

Turn off the indoor/outdoor power.

6. Return the following setup as before.

• Relay connector

• SW30-2

• SW01, 02, 03

147

15. TEST OPERATION

Before test operation

WARNING

To protect the compressor at starting time, keep power-ON condition before 12 hours or more.

• Before turning on the power supply, carry out the following items.

1) Using 500V-megger, check there is 1M

Ω or more between the terminal block of the power supply and the earth. If 1M

Ω or less is detected, do not run the unit.

2) Check that all the valves of the outdoor unit are fully opened.

• Never push the electromagnetic contactor to carry out a forced test operation.

(It is very dangerous because a protective device does not work.)

<Check list 1>

• Using the “Check list 1”, check there is no trouble in the installation work.

Is capacity of the leak breaker appropriate?

Outdoor total capacity

Is diameter of the power cable correct?

Is control communication line correct?

XXXX A Header unit (A) XXXX A

Follower unit (B) XXXX A

Follower unit (C) XXXX A

Header unit (A) XXXX mm

Follower unit (B) XXXX mm

Follower unit (C) XXXX mm

Indoor unit

Indoor unit

XXXX A

XXXX mm

Indoor –outdoor connection terminals (U1, U2)

Outdoor–outdoor connection terminals (U5, U6)

XXXX

XXXX

Central control system connection terminals (U3, U4) XXXX

Is power of indoor units supplied collectively?

Is earth grounded?

Is insulation good?

XXXX M

Ω or more

XXXX V Is the main power voltage good?

Is diameter of connecting pipe correct?

Is the branch kit correct?

Is drain water of the indoor unit arranged so that it flows without accumulation?

Is thermal insulation of pipes good? (Connecting pipes, Branch kit)

Is not short-circuit of discharge air in indoor/outdoor units?

After airtight test for pipes, are vacuuming and adding of refrigerant executed?

Are valves of all the outdoor units fully opened?

Header unit (A)

Follower unit (B)

Follower unit (C)

Gas side

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

Liquid side

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

Balance side

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

148

How to execute test operation

• To carry out a fan operation in a single indoor unit, turn off the power once, short CN72 on P.C. board, and then turn on the power again. (Start the unit in FAN mode.) In this case, do not forget to clear short-circuit of CN72 after test operation.

• Using the remote controller, check the operation in the usual operation. For the operation procedure, refer to the attached Owner’s Manual.

A forced test operation can be executed in the following procedure under condition of thermo-OFF of room temperature.

In order to prevent a serial operation, the forced test operation is released after 60 minutes and returns to the usual operation.

NOTE

Do not use a forced operation in cases other than test operation because it applies an excessive load to the air conditioner.

2, 4

3

1, 5

UNIT

SET CL

In case of wired remote controller

Procedure Description

1

Keep button pushed for 4 seconds or more. [TEST] is displayed on the display part and the selection of mode in the test mode is permitted.

TEST

2

3

4

5

Push button.

Using button, select the operation mode, [COOL] or [HEAT].

• Do not run the air conditioner in a mode other than [COOL] or

[HEAT].

• The temperature controlling function does not work during test operation.

• The detection of error is performed as usual.

After the test operation, push

(Display part is same as procedure

1

)

button to stop the operation.

Push button to cancel (release from) the test operation mode.

([TEST] disappears on the display part and the status returns to a normal stop status.)

149

15-1. Test Operation Check

15-1-1. Fan Check

START

Push [START/STOP] button.

When an error code has been displayed on the remote controller, remove the error cause referring to “Check code and check position displayed on remote controller and outdoor unit”.

Select the operation mode [FAN].

Is air discharged from the discharge port of the indoor unit?

NO

YES

Is there no abnormal sound?

YES

NO

Check indoor fan, fan motor, and fan circuit.

Check peripherals of the fan.

Normal

Check each indoor unit successively.

150

15-1-2. Cooling/Heating Test Operation Check

The cooling/heating test operation check can be performed on both remote controller and outdoor interface P.C.

board.

1. Test operation start/stop operation

<Test operation from remote controller>

Wired remote controller

: Refer to the lower items in “Test operation” of wired remote controller.

Wireless remote controller : Refer to the lower items in “Test operation” of wireless remote controller.

Wired remote controller

1

When pushing button for 4 seconds or more, [TEST] is displayed in the display section and the mode enters in test operation mode.

1,

5

TEST

2

Push button.

3

Using button, select an operation mode [COOL] or [HEAT].

• Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT].

SET CL

• Temperature adjustment is unavailable during test operation.

• Error is detected as usual.

UNIT

TEST

2,

4

3

4

When the test operation has finished, push button to stop the operation.

(The same display as that in procedure 1) appears in the display section.)

5

Push button to clear the test operation mode.

([TEST] display in the display section disappears and the status returns to the normal stop status.)

Wireless remote controller

(Except 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type and Under Ceiling type)

1

Remove the nameplate of the sensor section by inserting a minus screwdriver, etc into the notch at the bottom of the plate, and set the Dip switch to [TEST ON].

2

Execute a test operation with button on the wireless remote controller.

• , , and LED flash during test operation.

• Under status of [TEST RUN ON], the temperature adjustment from the wireless remote controller is invalid.

Do not use this method in the operation other than test operation because the equipment is damaged.

3

Use either COOL or HEAT operation mode for a test operation.

* The outdoor unit does not operate approx. 3 minutes after power-ON and operation stop.

4

After the test operation finished, stop the air conditioner from the wireless remote controller, and return Dip switch of the sensor section as before.

(A 60-minutes timer clearing function is attached to the sensor section in order to prevent a continuous test operation.)

Receiver unit

Spacers

M4 × 25 screws

(2 pieces)

Small screw

Nameplate

Notch

151

Wireless remote controller (4-way Air Discharge Cassette type)

1

Turn off power of the air conditioner.

Remove the adjust corner cap attached with sensor section from the ceiling panel. For removing method, follow to the installation manual attached to the ceiling panel.

(Be careful to handle the sensor section because cables are connected to the sensor section.)

Remove the sensor cover from the adjust corner cap. (1 screw)

2

Change Bit [1: TEST] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from OFF to ON.

Mount the sensor cover and attach the adjust corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel.

Turn on power of the air conditioner.

3

Push button of the wireless remote controller, and select an operation mode

[COOL] or [HEAT] with button. (All the display lamps of the wireless remote controller sensor section flash during the test operation.)

• Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT].

• Error is detected as usual.

4

When the test operation has finished, push button to stop the operation.

5

Turn off power of the air conditioner.

Change Bit [1] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from ON to OFF.

Attach the adjust corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel.

Sensor cover

Adjust corner cap

S003 Bit 1 : OFF ON

4 3 2 1

ON

Sensor P.C. board

<Test operation from outdoor unit>

Refer to “Function of Start/Stop the Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit” in “Service Support Function”.

NOTE) The test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes have passed.

152

In case of wireless remote controller

Procedure

1

2

Description

Turn on power of the air conditioner.

The operation is not accepted for 5 minutes when power has been turned on at first time after installation, and 1 minute when power has been turned on at the next time and after. After the specified time has passed, perform a test operation.

Push [Start/Stop] button and change the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] with [Mode] button.

Then change the fan speed to [High] using [Fan] button.

Test cooling operation Test heating operation

3

4

5

6

7

Set temperature to [18°C] using [Temperature set] button.

After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately push [Temperature set] button to set to [19°C]

Set temperature to [30°C] using [Temperature set] button.

After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately push [Temperature set] button to set to [29°C].



Then repeat the procedure

4

→

5

→

4

→

5

.

After approx. 10 seconds, all the display lamps on the sensor part of wireless remote controller, [Operation]

(Green), [Timer] (Green), and [Ready] (Yellow) flash and the air conditioner starts operation.

If the lamps do not flash, repeat the procedure

2

and after.

After the test operation, push [Start/Stop] button to stop the operation.

<Outline of test operation from the wireless remote controller>

Test cooling operation:

Start

→ 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → (Test operation) → Stop

Test heating operation:

Start

→ 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → (Test operation) → Stop

Be sure to set the air speed to [High]

2

3, 4, 5, 6

2, 7

153

Wireless remote controller (High wall type 2 series)

REQUIREMENT

1. For the operation procedure, be sure to follow the Owner’s Manual.

2. Finish the forced cooling operation in a short time because it applies excessive strength to the air conditioner.

3. A test operation of forced heating is unavailable. Perform a test operation by heating operation using the switches of the remote controller.

However heating operation may be not carried out according to the temperature conditions.

• Check wiring/piping of indoor and outdoor units

1. Open the front panel.

2. When pushing “TEMPORARY” button for 10 seconds or more, “Pi!” sound is heard and the operation changes to a forced cooling operation. After approx. 3 minutes, a cooling operation starts forcedly.

Check cool air starts blowing. If the operation does not start, check wiring again.

3. To stop a test operation, push “TEMPORARY” button once again (Approx. 1 second).

The up/down air flow adjusting plate closes and the operation stops.

• Check transmission of remote controller

1. Push “START/STOP” button of the remote controller to check an operation can also start by the remote controller.

• When pushing “TEMPORARY” button once (For 1 second), the operation changes to automatic operation.

For a forced cooling operation, keep the “TEMPORARY” button pushed over 10 seconds.

• “Cooling” operation by the remote controller may be unavailable according to the temperature conditions.

Check wiring/piping of the indoor and outdoor units in forced cooling operation.

154

2. Test operation

START

Execute a test operation for an indoor unit.

Refer to “Test operation procedure” of indoor remote controller.

The operation starts.

The operation does not start approx. 3 minutes after power-ON or operation stop.

(NOTE)

After power-ON, it may require Max. 10 minutes to start the operation due to the initial communication of the system.

Check operation status of the compressor.

Is cold air or hot air discharged?

Is air circulation good?

Check direction of the louver.

Execute test operation for each unit successively.

Operate all the indoor units simultaneously.

Execute a test operation using

“Function of start/stop the indoor unit from outdoor unit” in “Service support function”.

(NOTE 1)

Is the temperature difference between suction and discharge good?

YES

Is the operating voltage correct?

(Rated voltage ±10%)

YES

(NOTE 2)

Is the operating current normal?

YES

(NOTE 3)

Is the operating pressure normal?

YES

Normal

NO

NO

NO

NO

• Check power voltage of the main power supply.

• Check cable diameter of the power supply.

• Check temperature load in indoor/outdoor.

• Check cable length and refrigerant amount.

• Check operating Hz of compressor.

• Check abnormal sound in outdoor unit.

(Abnormal sound, etc of compressor and others)

155

(NOTE 1) Criterion for difference between suction and discharge temperature

1. Cooling (All Cooling operation)

After operation for minimum 30 minutes with [COOL] mode, if there is the dry bulb temperature difference

T: 8°C or more between suction port and discharge port of the indoor unit, it is normal.

(In Max-Hz operation)

2. Heating (All Heating operation)

After operation for minimum 30 minutes with [COOL] mode, if there is the dry bulb temperature difference

T: 15°C or more between suction port and discharge port of the indoor unit, it is normal.

(In Max-Hz operation)

∗ Consider that the temperature difference •¢T may diminish in cases of system in which the connected indoor capacity exceeds 100%, a long pipe length, a large difference.

(NOTE 2) Criterion for operating power current

For a test operation (All the indoor units operate), it is normal when the power current is under the following values.

Outdoor unit

Current value

8HP

18

10HP

21

12HP

22

(Unit: A)

(NOTE 3) Criterion for cycle status

1. Refrigerating cycle under standard condition

The refrigerating cycle under standard cooling and heating condition is as follows:

Pressure

Pipe surface temp

COMP operation rotation count

(MPa)

(°C)

(rps)

Air temp condition (DB/WB) (°C)

High (Pd)

Low

Discharge

Suction

Indoor heat exchanger

Outdoor heat exchanger (TE1)

Liquid temp (TL)

Compressor

Compressor

1

2

Indoor

Outdoor

(Ps)

(TD)

(TS1)

(TC)

10HP

MMY-MAP1002FT8

All cooling standard

3.1

All heating standard

2.9

43

36

79

79

0.8

86

6

8

27/19

35/–

0.7

90

3

46

1

36

75

75

20/–

7/6

∗ This compressor is driven with 4-pole motor. The value of the compressor frequency (Hz) measured by a clamp meter is two times of the rotation count (rps) of the compressor.

∗ This data is the cycle data under condition of the standard pipe length and two 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioners connected. Data changes according to installed pipe length, combination of indoor units, or connected indoor capacity.

∗ For a compressor, the left side is 1 and the right side is 2 viewed from the front side.

Even if two compressors operate, the frequency difference may be a little set as measures against resonance.

∗ The temperature of indoor heat exchanger (TC) indicates TCJ sensor temperature in cooling time, and TC2 sensor temperature in heating time respectively.

2. Criterion for operating pressure

General criterion is as follows:

Cooling

Heating

High pressure : 2.0 to 3.2MPa

Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.9MPa

High pressure : 2.5 to 3.3MPa

Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.7MPa

Indoor :18 to 32°C

Outdoor :25 to 35°C

AIndoor :15 to 25°C

Outdoor : 5 to 10°C

When all the units operate in cooling mode

When all the units operate in heating mode

Using the rotary switch on the outdoor unit I/F, the operating pressure, cycle temperature, and compressor rotation count can be checked on 7-segment display.

Refer to “Outdoor cycle data display” and “Indoor cycle data display” in “Support function in test operation”.

156

16. SUPPORT FUNCTION IN TEST OPERATION

16-1. 7-segment display function of outdoor unit (I/F P.C. board)

On the interface control P.C. board, 7-segment LED to check the operating status is provided on the control P.C.

board.

The displayed contents are exchanged by combining the setup numbers of the rotary switches (SW01, SW02, and

SW03) on P.C. board.

Interface P.C. board

SW06 SW07 SW08 SW09

7-segment display A

7-segment display B

CN30 CN31 SW05 SW15

D600

CN32 SW04

D601 D602 D603 D604

2nd place

1nd place

3nd place

2nd place

1nd place

SW06 SW07 SW08 SW09

CN30 CN31 SW05 SW15

D600

CN32

D601

SW04

D602 D603 D604

Display A

SW01 SW02 SW03

Display B

Display A

Display B

SW01 SW02 SW03

When the system stopped due to a trouble of the outdoor unit, execute a check in the following procedure.

1. Open panel of the outdoor unit, and then check the 7-segment display.

The check code is displayed at the right side of 7-segment display.

[U1] [

{{{] ([{{{]: Check code)

∗ Switch setup when confirming the check code: SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1]

However the check code [

{{{] is displayed for 3 seconds and the sub-code [{{{] for 1 second are alternately displayed if an sub-code is provided.

2. Confirm the check code, and then perform the check operation based on the procedure of each check code diagnosis.

3. Perform the check operation based on the procedure of each check code diagnosis.

How to read the check monitor

<7-segment display>

157

1. System information data display (Displayed on the header outdoor unit only)

SW01 SW02 SW03

1 1 3 Used refrigerant

2 System capacity

Display contents

Displays type of used refrigerant.

Model with refrigerant R410A

Model with refrigerant R407C

A [ 8] to [30] : 8 to 30HP

B [HP]

A r4 r4

B

10A

07C

7

8

9

4

5

6

11

12

13

10

14

15

16

No. of connected indoor units/

No. of units with cooling thermo ON

No. of connected indoor units/

No. of units with heating thermo ON

Compressor command correction amount

Release control

Oil-equation control

Oil-equalization request

A [ 0] to [48] : 0 to 16 units (No. of connected units)

B [C0] to [C48] : 0 to 16 units (No. of units with cooling thermo ON)

A [ 0] to [48] : 0 to 16 units (No. of connected units)

B [H0] to [H48] : 0 to 16 units (No. of units with heating thermo ON)

A Data is displayed with hexadecimal notation

B

A Normal time : [ r], During release control: [r1]

B —

A Normal time : [oiL-0]

B During oil equation : [oiL-1]

A Displays with segment LED lighting pattern

B

Display B Display A

F

E

A

G

B

C

D Dp

U2 U3

F in the left figure goes on:

Header requests oil equalization.

C in the left figure goes on:

Follower requests oil-equalization.

(Outdoor unit number)

Refrigerant oil recovery operation

Automatic address

Demand operation

Option control (P.C. board input)

A During sending of cooling refrigerant oil recovery signal : [C1].

Normal time : [C ]

B During sending of heating refrigerant oil recovery signal : [H1].

Normal time : [H ]

A [Ad]

B Automatic addressing : [FF], Normal time : [ ]

A [dU]

B Normal time : [ ]. In 50% to 90% : [ 50 to 90]

When controlling by BUS line input : [E50 to E90]

Displays option control status

Operation mode selection : Normal time

Heating only

Cooling only

Batch start/stop

Start input

Stop input

: Normal time

Night low-noise operation : Normal time

Operation input

Snowfall fan operation : Normal time

Operation input

Same as above

A B h.

∗ ∗.∗.∗.

H.

∗ ∗.∗.∗.

C.

∗ ∗.∗.∗.

∗.….

∗.∗.∗.

∗.1.

∗.∗.∗.

∗.0.

∗.∗.∗.

∗.∗.

….∗.∗.

∗.∗.

1.

∗.∗.

∗.∗.

∗.….∗.

∗.∗.

∗.1.∗.

Option control (BUS line input)

Unused

— A

B

—

—

158

2. Outdoor unit information data display (Displayed on each outdoor unit)

SW01 SW02 SW03

1 1 1

2

3

4

5

6

Error data

—

Operation mode

Outdoor unit HP

Outdoor fan mode


A Displays outdoor unit number: [U1] to [U3]

B Displays check code (Latest code only is displayed.)

There is no check code: [– – –]

There is auxiliary code: Check code [

∗ ∗ ∗] for 3 seconds, auxiliary code [–

∗ ∗] for 1 second alternately

<SW04> push function: Fan of unit with error only drives. 7-segment A: [E1]

<SW04 + SW05> push function: Fan of normal unit only drives. 7-segment A: [E0]

<SW05> push function: Interruption of fan operation function

A —

Compressor operation command

B —

A Stop: [ ]

All cooling: [ C], All heating: [ H], Normal defrost: [ J]

Mainly cooling, partly heating [Ch]

Mainly heating, partly cooling [Hc]

B —

A 8HP: [ 8], 10HP: [10], 12HP: [12]

B [HP]

A No.1 compressor operation command is displayed.

Data display with HEX: [00 to FF]

B No.2 compressor operation command is displayed.

Data display with HEX: [00 to FF]

<SW04> push function: Inverter frequency is exchanged to decimal notation.

7-segment display (A/B): [

∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ H] (Normal display by pushing <SW05>)

A [FP]

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Compressor backup

—

Control valve output data

PMV1 /PMV2 opening

PMV3 opening

Oil level judgment status

B Mode 0 to 31: [ 0 to 31]

A Displays No.1 compressor setup status

Normal time: [ ], Backup setup: [C1]

B Displays No.2 compressor setup status

Normal time: [ ], Backup setup: [C2]

A —

B —

Displays control output status of solenoid valve

4-way valve: ON / 4-way valve 2: OFF

4-way valve: OFF / 4-way valve 2: ON

SV2: ON / SV5: OFF

SV2: OFF / SV5: ON

SV3A: ON / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: ON / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: ON /SV3D: OFF

SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: ON

SV41: ON / SV42: OFF

SV41: OFF / SV42: ON

A B

… … …

H. 1

H. 0

… … …

2. 1

… 5. 0

2. 0

… 5. 1

3. 1

3. 0

3. 0

3. 0

4. …

4. …

0 0 0

1 0 0

0 1 0

0 0 1

1 0 …

0 1 …

SV11: ON / SV12: OFF 1. … 1 0 …

SV11: OFF / SV12: ON

Displays opening data (Decimal) (Total opening)

Displays opening data (Decimal)

1. … 0 1 …

∗ ∗

… ∗

∗ ∗. P

∗ ∗. P

A [oL]

<SW05> push SW function: 2 seconds, The following data is displayed.

* During determination of shortage in compressor 1: [L …], during determination of shortage in compressor 2: [… L]

B Initial display: [… … …], Oil level judgment result: [A. #.

∗]

Judgment result of compressor 1 in [#], compressor 2 in [

∗]

(0: Correct, 1, 2: Shortage) is displayed.

159

3. Outdoor cycle data display (Displayed on each outdoor unit)

SW01

1

SW02

1

SW03

2 Pd pressure data

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Ps pressure data

TD1 sensor data

TD2 sensor data

TS1 sensor data

TS2 sensor data

TE sensor data

TL sensor data

TO sensor data

TK1 sensor data

TK2 sensor data

TK3 sensor data

TK4 sensor data

—

—


Pd pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.

(MPaG: Approx. 1/10 value of kg/cm

2

G data)

Ps pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.

A B

P d.

∗. ∗ ∗

P S.

∗. ∗ ∗

A

B

A

B

Temperature sensor data (°C) is displayed with decimal notation.

• Symbol display for 1 sec. and data display for 3 sec. are alternately exchanged.

• Data is displayed in [

∗].

• Negative data is displayed as [–

∗ ∗ ∗ ∗].

Symbol t d 1

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol t d 2

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol t S 1

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol t S 2

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol tE

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol t L

Data

∗ ∗ ∗. ∗

Symbol t o

Data

∗

Symbol F 1

Data

∗

Symbol F 2

Data

∗

Symbol F 3

Data

∗

Symbol F 4

Data

∗

∗ ∗. ∗

∗ ∗. ∗

∗ ∗. ∗

∗ ∗. ∗

∗ ∗. ∗

—

—

—

4. Data display of follower outdoor cycle (Displayed on the header unit)

∗ This method is used when information of the follower unit is displayed on 7-segment display of the header unit.

SW01

3

SW02

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

SW03

1 to 2 Error data

Installed compressor type

Outdoor unit capacity


A [U.

∗] ∗: SW03 setup number + 1 number (Outdoor unit number U2 to U3)

B Check code is displayed. (Latest check code only)

No check code: [– – –]

A [U.


B

A [U.


B 8HP: [··· ··· 8]. 10HP: [··· 1 0], 8 to 12HP

Compressor operation command A [U.


Fan operation mode

B No.1 compressor ON: [C10], No.2 compressor ON: [C01]

For unconnected compressor, “ – ” is displayed.

A [U.


Release signal

Oil level judgment

B Stop time: [F ··· 0], Mode 31: [F 3 1]

A [U.


B Normal time: [r ··· ···], Release received: [r ··· 1]

A [U.


B Normal time: [··· ··· ···], Oil shortage: [··· ··· L]

NOTE) The follower unit is setup by changing SW03.

SW03

7-segment display A

1

U2

2

U3

160

5. Indoor unit information data display (Displayed on the header oudoor unit only)

7

11

12

13

8

9

10

SW01 SW02 SW03

4 1 to 16 1 to 3 Receiving status of indoor BUS communication

5

6

Indoor check code

Indoor horse power

Indoor request command

(S code)

Indoor PMV opening data

Indoor TA sensor data

Indoor TF sensor data

Indoor TCJ sensor data

Indoor TC1 sensor data

Indoor TC2 sensor data


B Receiving time: [… … 1], Not received: [… … …]

B No check code: [– – –]

B 0. 2, 0. 5, 0. 8, … 1, 1. 2, 1. 7, … 2, 2. 5, … 3, 3. 2, … 4, … 5,

… 6, … 8, 1 0, 1 6, 2 0

B Data is displayed with HEX. Heating [H … 0 to H … F]

Cooling [C … 0 to C … F]

B Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation.






NOTE) Indoor address No. is set up by exchanging SW02 and SW03.

SW03

1

2

SW02

1 to 16 SW02 setup number

1 to 16

Indoor address

SW02 setup number + 16

3 1 to 16 SW02 setup number + 32

7-segment display A

[01] to [16]

[17] to [32]

[33] to [48]

6. Outdoor EEPROM write-in error code display (Displayed on the header outdoor unit only)

∗ The latest error code written in EEPROM of each outdoor unit is displayed.

(It is used when confirming the error code after power supply has been reset.)

Set SW01 to 03 as shown in the following table, and the push SW04 for 5 seconds or more to display an error code.

SW01 SW02 SW03

1

1

2

3

16


The latest error code of the header unit (U1)

The latest error code of the followewr unit 1 (U2)

The latest error code of the followewr unit 2 (U3)

• 7-segment display A, B

7-segment display

A B

E. r

E. r

E. r

1. – –

2. – –

3. – –

Display A Display B

D600 D601 D602 D603 D604

161

16-2. Service Support Function

16-2-1. Function to Start/Stop (ON/OFF) Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit

The following functions of the indoor unit can start or stop by operation of the switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

No.

1

Function

Cooling test operation

Outline

Changes the mode of all the connected indoor units collectively to cooling test operation.

Note) Control operation same as usual test operation from remote control is performed.

Setup/Release

[Setup]

Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more with SW01”2”, SW02”5”, SW03”1”.

[Release]

Return SW01, SW02, Sw03 to “1”.


Section A

[C ]

Section B

[ –C]

2

3

4

Heating test operation

Batch start

Batch stop

Individual start

Changes the mode of all the connected indoor units collectively to heating test operation.

Note) Control operation same as usual test operation from remote control is performed.

Section A

[H ]

Section B

[ –H]

Starts all the connected indoor units collectively.

Note) The contents follow to the setup of remote controller.

[Setup]


[Release]


Section A

[CH]

Section B

[ 11]

[ 11] is displayed on

Section B for 5 seconds.

Stops all the connected indoor units collectively.

[Setup]


[Release]


Starts the specified indoor unit.

Notes)

• The contents follow to the setup of remote controller.

• The other indoor units keep the status as they are.

[Setup]


[Release]


Section A

[CH]

Section B

[ 00]

[ 00] is displayed on

Section B for 5 seconds.

[Setup]

Set SW01 “16” and set SW02 and

SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be started, and then push SW04 for

2 seconds or more

[Release]


Section A

[ ]

Section B

[ ]

Section A:

Displays the corresponding indoor address.

Section B:

Displays [ 11] for 5 seconds from operation-ON.

Individual stop Stops the specified indoor unit.

Note) The other indoor units keep the status as they are.

[Setup]


SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be stopped, and then push SW05 for 2 seconds or more

[Release]


Section A

[ ]

Section B

[ ]

Section A:


Section B:

Displays [ 00] for 5 seconds from operation-OFF.

Individual test operation

Operates the specified indoor unit.

Note) The other indoor units keep the status as they are.

[Setup]


SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be operated, and then push SW04 for 10 seconds or more

[Release]


Section A

[ ]

Section B

[ ]

Section A:


Section B:

Displays [ FF] for 5 seconds from test operation-ON.

NOTE 1) This start/stop function only sends the signals from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit, such as start, stop, operation mode, etc, but it does not resend the signals even if the indoor unit does not follow the sent signals.

NOTE 2) The above controls are not used during abnormal stop.

Interface P.C. board 7-segment display [A] 7-segment display [B]

SW04 SW05

162

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

1. All cooling test operation function

This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same system to the cooling test operation mode by using switches on the interface board of the outdoor unit.

<Operation procedure>

Power ON

Be sure to turn on power at the outdoor side after power-ON of indoor unit.

Set SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [2],

Sw02 to [5], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([C ] is displayed on

7-segment display [A].)

Push SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit for

2 seconds or more.

[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated. Check that “-C” is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

[A]

[ ]

[B]

[ –C]

Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the remote controller of the indoor unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively or push the push-switch

SW05 for 2 seconds or more.

Start

Operation check

Stop/End


SW04 SW05

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

NOTE) The test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes.

163

2. All heating test operation function

This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same system to the heating test operation mode by using switches on the interface board of the outdoor unit.


Power ON



Sw02 to [6], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([H ] is displayed on

7-segment display [A].)


2 seconds or more.

[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated. Check that “-H” is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

[A]

[ H ]

[B]

[ –H]

Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively or push the push-switch


Start

Operation check

Stop/End


SW04 SW05

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

NOTE) The test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes.

Even if outdoor temperature exceeds 21°C, all heating test operation can be performed.

164

3. Batch start/stop (ON/OFF) function

This function is provided to start/stop collectively all the indoor units connected to the same system by using switches on the interface board of the outdoor unit.


Power ON

Set up the operation mode of the remote controller.

(If it is not set up, the operation starts with the current mode.)

(FAN/COOL/HEAT)


If an error is already displayed under condition of

SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1], return the status to normal one according to troubleshooting and then execute a test operation.

The unit which is not given with priority by heating priority control, cooling priority control, and selection of cooling or heating mode is not operated. In this case,

[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the remote controller.


Sw02 to [7], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([CH ] is displayed on 7-segment display [A].)


2 seconds or more.

The indoor unit to be started operates.

Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit for 2 seconds or more.

Start

Operation check

If the discharge temperature does not change

( )

remote controller, misconnection is considered.

Stop

After test operation, return the rotary switches SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to

[1], [1], [1] respectively.

End


SW04 SW05

165

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

4. Individual start/stop (ON/OFF) individual test operation function

This function is provided to start/stop (ON/OFF) individually each indoor unit connected to the same system by using switches on the interface board of the outdoor unit.

Set SW01 [16] and set SW02 and SW03 to indoor address No. (1 to 64) to be started (Refer to the following table*) - only the setup indoor unit starts operation.

(In the rotary switches of the indoor unit which operates in a group by the remote controller, the follower indoor unit cannot be individually started or stopped. In this case, [ --] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.)


Power ON


Set up the operation mode of the remote controller.

(If it is not set up, the operation starts with the current mode.)

If an error is already displayed under condition of SW01 [1],

SW02 [1], SW03 [1], return the status to normal one according to troubleshooting and then execute a test operation.

The unit which is not given with priority by heating priority control, cooling priority control, and selection of cooling or heating mode is not operated. In this case, [ ] or [ ] is displayed on the remote controller.


SW04 SW05

Match the rotary switch on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit * with in the following table.

[A]

[ ]

(7-segment display)

[B]

[ ]

Address display of corresponding indoor unit

[ 00] is displayed for

5 seconds after operation-ON.

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface

P.C. board of the outdoor unit for 2 seconds or more.

(If pushing this switch continuously for 10 seconds or more, the operation changes to the individual test operation.)

[A]

[ ]


[B]

[ ]




(For individual test operation,[ FF] is displayed.)

Start

The indoor unit to be started operates.

Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface

P.C. board of the outdoor unit for 2 seconds or more.

[A]

[ ]


[B]

[ ]




After test operation, return the display select switches SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface

P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively.

End

*

SW01 SW02 SW03

16 1 to 16 1

Units to be operated

Address 1

to

Address 16

}

individually

16

16

16

1 to 16

1 to 16

1 to 16

2

3

4

Address 17

to

Address 32

}

individually

In individual start/stop

Address 33

to

Address 48

}

individually

Address 49

to

Address 64

}

individually

NOTE) The individual test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes.

166

5. Error Clearing Function

[1] Clearing from the main remote controller

[Error clearing in outdoor unit]

Error of the outdoor unit is cleared by the unit of one refrigerant circuit system to which the indoor units operated by the remote controller. (Error of the indoor unit is not cleared.)

For clearing errors, the service monitor function of the remote controller is used.

<Method>

1

Change the mode to service monitor mode by pushing

CL

+ buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.

2

Using / buttons, set “FF” to item code.

The display in Section A in the following figure is counted with interval of 5 seconds as

“ ”

→

”

→

”

→

”

→

”

→

”.

When the count arrives “

∗ However, counting from “

”, the error is cleared.

” is repeated on the display.

3

When button is pushed, the status returns to the normal status.


1

→

2

→

3

The status returns to the normal status.

Section A

3

1

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

CODE No.

SET CL

UNIT

2

[Error clearing in indoor unit]

Error in the indoor unit is cleared by button on the remote controller.

(Only error of the indoor unit connected with operating remote controller is cleared.)

167

[2] Clearing from the interface P.C. board

Using the switches on the interface P.C. board, this function is to clear the currently detected error for each refrigerant circuit system without resetting the power supply.

(

→ Restart of error detection)

Errors in both outdoor and indoor units are once cleared.

Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to the following setting.

SW01=[2] SW02=[16] SW03=[1]


[A] [B]

[ E ] [ ]

Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 5 seconds or more.

[ C L] is displayed in 7-segment display [B] on the P.C. board

(for 5 seconds), and the error is completely cleared.


[A] [B]

[ E ] [ C L ]

Interface P.C. board

7-segment display [A]

Push switch

SW04

Push switch

SW05

7-segment display [B]

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

[3] Clearing of error check code by power reset

This function is provided to clear error in a refrigerant circuit system by resetting the power of all the outdoor and the indoor units.

(

→ Restart of error detection)

As same as the clearing method on the interface P.C. board, errors of both the outdoor and the indoor units are once cleared.

<Method>

1. Be sure to reset power of both the outdoor and the indoor units.

2. Turn on the power of the indoor unit prior to the power of the outdoor unit.

(If the power is turned on in reverse order, a check code [E19] is output.)

NOTE) After power reset, it requires usually 3 minutes to power-on due to the initial communication of the system. In same cases, it requires Max. 10 minutes.

168

16-2-2. Remote Controller Distinction Function

This function is provided to distinguish the remote controller connected from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit for a refrigerant system using switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

<Distinction procedure>

Power ON

Be sure turn on the power of the indoor unit prior to the power of the outdoor unit.

Set the display select switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit as follows:

SW01

→ [2]

SW02

→ [4]

SW03

→ [1]


[A]

[ A 1 ]

[B]

[ ]

Operation



[A]

[ A 1 ]

[B]

[ FF ]

[CHECK] display of the connected remote controller flashes.

Check the connected remote controller.


End

Other end conditions:

1. 10 minutes passed for sending operation

2. SW01, SW02, or SW03 changed to other position.


SW04 SW05

169

SW01 SW02 SW03

<Rotary switch>

16-2-3. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open/Close Function in Indoor Unit

This function is provided to open or close forcedly PMV for 2 minutes in all the indoor units by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.

After then, it is also used to open PMV fully when turning off the power and executing an operation.

<Operation>

[Open fully]

Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1], and push


(Display appears on 7-segment display for 2 minutes as follows.)

[P ] [ FF]

[Close fully]

Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1], and push


(Display appears on 7-segment display as follows.)

[P ] [ 00]

[Clear]

After 2 minutes (1 minutes for “Close fully”) passed when setup has finished, the opening automatically returns to the normal opening.

16-2-4. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open Fully/Close fully Function in Outdoor Unit

This function is provided to forcedly open or close fully Pulse Motor Valve (PMV1/PMV2 and PMV3) used in the outdoor unit for 2 minutes.

[PMV selection]

By setting SW12-1, PMV which you want to operate can be selected.

SW12 bit 1

OFF

ON

PMV1/PMV2

PMV3

[Open fully]

Short-circuit for CN30 on the outdoor interface P.C. board.

[Close fully]

Short-circuit for CN31 on the outdoor interface P.C. board.

[Clear]

After 2 minutes, the opening returns to the normal opening.

Be sure to remove the short-circuited cord after confirmation.

I/F P.C. board

Check connector

CN30

Check connector

CN31

170

16-2-5. Solenoid Valve Forced Open/Close Function in Outdoor Unit

This function is provided to forcedly open each solenoid valve mounted in the outdoor unit by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit. When checking there is no refrigerant clogging with ON/OFF operation of the solenoid valve, use this function.

[Operation]

1. Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [2], SW02 to [1], SW03 to [3].

2. When [H. r] is displayed in 7-segment display [A], keep pushing the switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.

3. From when [2] is displayed in 7-segment display [B], SV2 is turned on.

4. After then, ON and OFF of each solenoid valve are exchanged by changing the setup number of the switch

SW02.

(ON/OFF output pattern of each solenoid valve is as follows.)

NOTE 1) Display in 7-segment display [B] is exchanged just when the number of SW02 has been changed, on the other hand, the solenoid valve output is exchanged when SW02 has kept with the same number for 5 seconds or more.

NOTE 2) The mark [

{

] in the table indicates the corresponding solenoid valve is forcedly turned on.

NOTE 3) The mark [—] in the table indicates ON/OFF of the solenoid valve is controlled based upon the specifications of the air conditioner.—

NOTE 4) The mark [

×

] in the table indicates the corresponding solenoid valve is forcedly turned off with this operation.

NOTE 5) The case heater outputs for both compressor and accumulator heaters.

SW02


[B]

1

2

[

…

2

…

]

[

…

5

…

]

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

[

…

6 — ]

[

…

1 1 ]

[

…

1 2 ]

[

…

4 1 ]

[

…

4 2 ]

[

…

4 — ]

[

…

3 A ]

[

…

3 b ]

[

…

3 C ]

[

…

3 d ]

[

…

3 E ]

[

…

3 — ]

[

… … …

]

16 [ A L L ]

SV2 SV5 SV6 SV11 SV12 SV41 SV42 SV3A SV3B SV3C SV3D SV3E

{

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

— — — — — — — — — —

{

{

— — — — — — — — —

{

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

{

— — — — — — — —

{

—

{

— — — — — — —

{

—

—

—

—

{

— — — — — —

{

—

{

— — — — —

{

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

{

— — — —

{

{ {

— — — —

{

—

—

—

—

{

— — —

{

—

{

— —

{

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

{

—

{

—

{ {

— — — — — — — — —

×

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

{ { {

—

{

— — — —

{

{ { { { { { { { { { { {

Case heater

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

[Clear]

Return numbers of SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board to [1] each.

NOTE) As this control is not based on the specifications of the general air conditioner, be sure to release this mode after confirmation.

171

16-2-6. Fan forced Operation Function in Outdoor Unit

This function is provided to forcedly operate the fan in the outdoor unit by the switch operation on the interface

P.C. board in the outdoor unit. The frequency of the fan can be controlled by setup of the switch. Therefore utilize this function to check the operation or abnormal sound in the fan system. Be sure to use this function during stop of controlling.

NOTE) Do not use this function during operation of the compressor. It may break the compressor.

[Operation]

1. Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [2], SW02 to [1], SW03 to [4].

2. When [F. d] is displayed in 7-segment display [A], keep pushing the switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.

3. From when [ 31] is displayed in 7-segment display [B], the fan starts operation. (Super mode operation)

4. After then, 7-segment display [B] and the fan mode are changed by changing the setup number of the switches

SW02 and SW03.

(Output pattern of the fan is as follows.)

12

13

14

15

16

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

SW02

1

2

3

SW03

4

7-segment display [B]

[ 31 ]

[ 30 ]

[ 29 ]

[ 28 ]

[ 27 ]

[ 26 ]

[ 25 ]

[ 24 ]

[ 23 ]

[ 22 ]

[ 21 ]

[ 20 ]

[ 19 ]

[ 18 ]

[ 17 ]

[ 16 ]

20

19

18

17

16

24

23

22

21

Fan mode

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

12

13

14

15

16

10

11

8

9

6

7

4

5

SW02

1

2

3

SW03

5

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[


[ 15 ]

[ 14 ]

[ 13 ]

[ 12 ]

[ 11 ]

[

[ 10 ]

9 ]

8 ]

7 ]

6 ]

5 ]

4 ]

3 ]

2 ]

1 ]

0 ]

2

1

4

3

0

6

5

8

7

Fan mode

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

[Clear]

This function is cleared by one of the following operations.

1. SW01 moved to other position.

2. Push-switch SW05 was pushed for 2 seconds or more.

172

16-2-7. Manual Adjustment Function of Outside Temp (TO) Sensor

This function is provided to fix TO sensor value manually by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit. When the unit stops abnormally due to TO sensor failure, etc, an emergent operation is available by set up the value manually to position near the current outside temperature.

[Operation]

1. Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board to numbers as follows.

• SW01 [2] / SW02 [1] / SW03 [15] • 7-segment display: [t o]

SW01

1

SW02

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6


[ 10 ]

[ 15 ]

[ 20 ]

[ 25 ]

[ 30 ]

[ 35 ]

[ 40 ]

[ 43 ]

TO sensor value

10°C

15°C

20°C

25°C

30°C

35°C

40°C

43°C

SW01

1

SW02

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16


[ 45 ]

[ –15 ]

[ –10 ]

[ – 5 ]

[ 0 ]

[ 2 ]

[ 5 ]

[ 7 ]

TO sensor value

45°C

–15°C

–10°C

–5°C

0°C

2°C

5°C

7°C

NOTE) Emergent operation should be restricted to one day or so on. If operating TO sensor fixed with this function, the system control operation of the air conditioner may not become one based upon the specification of the product. Therefore an emergent operation should be restricted to a day or so on.

2. Keep pushing the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board for 1 second or more.

The mode changes to the TO sensor value fix manual mode.

3. As shown in the following table, TO sensor value can be fixed by setting the rotary switch SW02 on the interface P.C. board.

[Clear]

Return numbers of SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit to [1/1/1] each.

16-2-8. Indoor Fan Operation Check Function

This function is provided to check operation of single indoor unit without using communication with the remote controller or outdoor unit. This function can be used regardless operating or stopping of the system.

However, if this function is used for a long time, a trouble of the air conditioner may be caused. Therefore using of this function should be restricted to several minutes.

[Operation]

1. Short-circuit CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board).

If short-circuiting DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board) while short-circuiting CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor

P.C. board), the indoor PMV only becomes the minimum opening (30 pulse). When opening DISP pin, it becomes the maximum opening again.

[Clear]

Open CHK pin. If the system is operating, it stops once but automatically restart after several minutes.

∗ For the details of CHK pin (CN71 on indoor P.C. board) and DISP pin (CN72 on indoor P.C. board), refer to

11. Control circuit configuration, Indoor unit 2, Indoor P.C. board MCC-1402 and MCC-1403.

16-2-9. Indoor Fan Only Operating Mode

When operating an air conditioner with indoor units and remote controller only in fan operation etc., this function can be used. A group operation is also available.

[Operation]

1) Short circuit DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board). However, if CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board) has been previously short circuited, this function is unavailable.

2) In a group operation, set up a group as usual.

3) While DISP pin is short circuited, all the sensor error judgment operation and communication with the outdoor unit are not performed. PMV is fixed to the Max. opening.

[Clear]

Open DISP pin.

173

16-2-10. Remote Controller Switch Monitor Function

When using a remote controller with the model name RBC-AMT21E, the following monitor functions can be used.

<Calling of display screen>

[Contents]

The temperature or the operation status of the remote controller, indoor unit, or each sensor of the outdoor unit can be known by calling up the service monitor mode from the remote controller.

[Procedure]

1

Push

CL

+ buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more to call up the service monitor mode. The service monitor goes on, and temperature of the item code

00

is firstly displayed.

2

Push the temperature setup / buttons to select the item number (Item code) to be monitored.

For displayed codes, refer to the following table.

3

Push

UNIT

button to change the item to one to be monitored. Then monitor the indoor unit and sensor temperature or operation status in the corresponding refrigerant system.

4

Pushing button returns the display to the normal display.

4

1

SET CL

UNIT No.

UNIT


1 2 3 4

CODE No.

Returns to the normal display

3

2

Item code

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

08

0A

0b

0C

0d

Data name

Room temp (During control)

Room temp (Remote controller)

Indoor suction temp (TA)

Indoor coil temp (TCJ)

Indoor coil temp (TC2)

Indoor coil temp (TC1)

Indoor discharge temp (Tf) (NOTE 1)

Indoor PMV opening

No. of connected indoor units

Total HP of connected indoor units

No. of connected outdoor units

Total HP of outdoor units

Unit

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C pls unit

HP unit

HP

Display format

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 1/10

× 10

× 10

18

19

1A

14

15

16

17

1b

1d

1E

1F

Item code

10

Data name

Compressor 1 discharge temp (Td1)

11

12

Compressor 2 discharge temp (Td2)

High-pressure sensor detention pressure (Pd)

13

Low-pressure sensor detention pressure (Ps)

Suction temp (TS)

Outdoor coil temp (TE)

Temp at liquid side (TL)

Outside temp (TO)

Low-pressure saturation temp (TU)

Compressor 1 current (I1)

Compressor 2 current (I2)

PMV1 + 2 opening

Compressor 1, 2 ON/OFF

Outdoor fan mode

Outdoor unit HP

Unit

°C

°C

MPa

MPa

°C

A

A

°C

°C

°C

°C pls

—

—

HP

(NOTE 1) Only a part of indoor unit types is installed with the discharge temperature sensor. This temperature is not displayed for other types.

(NOTE 2) When the units are connected to a group, data of the header indoor unit only can be displayed.

(NOTE 3) 01 : Compressor 1 only is ON.

10 : Compressor 2 only is ON.

11 : Both compressor 1 and 2 are ON.

Display format

× 1

× 1

× 100

× 100

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 1

× 10

× 10

× 1/10

(NOTE 3)

0 to 31

× 1

174

16-2-11. Abnormal Outdoor Unit Discrimination Method

<By Fan Operating Function>

This function is provided to forcedly operate the fan of the outdoor unit in which an error occurred or the fan of the normal outdoor unit by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the header unit.

To specify which one of the follower units connected to the system was faulty, use this function for the system stop due to a follower unit fault (Check code [E28]).

[Operation]

<In case to operate the fan in the erroneous outdoor unit only>

1. Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit are set to [1].


[A] [B]

Outdoor unit No.

Error code display

2. Push the push-switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.

3. “E1” is displayed on 7-segment display [A].

4. The fan of the outdoor unit in which error occurred starts operation within approx. 10 seconds when “E1” was displayed.

<In case to operate the fans in all the normal outdoor units>

1. Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board are set to [1/1/1].

2. Push the push-switches SW04 and SW05 at the same time for 2 seconds or more.

3. “E0” is displayed on 7-segment display [A].

4. The fans of all the normal outdoor units start operation with the Max. fan speed within approx. 10 seconds when “E0” was displayed.

[Clear]

Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit for 2 seconds or more.

The outdoor fan which was operated stops.

* Check [U. 1] is displayed on 7-segment display [A], and then finish the work.

175

16-3. Sensor Characteristics

16-3-1. Outdoor Unit

40

Characteristic-2

Outdoor TS1, TS2, TO, TL sensors

200

150

Characteristic-4

Outdoor TD1, TD2, TK1, TK2,

TK3, TK4 sensors

10

30

20

100 5

10

50

0

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Temperature [˚C]

0

10 20 30 40 50 60 100 110 120 130 140 150

Temperature [˚C]

0

200

150

100

Characteristic-5 Outdoor TE1 sensor

20

50 5

0

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Temperature [ C]

0

15

10

176

• I/O cable connection table

Pin No.

1

2

3

4

High pressure side (Pd)

I/O name Lead cable color

OUTPUT

—

GND

+5V

White

—

Black

Red

• Output voltage — Pressure

High pressure side (Pd)

0.5 to 3.9 V

0 to 3.33 MPa

Low pressure side (Ps)

0.5 to 3.5 V

0 to 0.98 MPa

5 5

Low pressure side (Ps)

I/O name Lead cable color

—

OUTPUT

GND

+5V

—

White

Black

Red

3.9

3.5

0.5

0

3.33

Voltage (MPa)

4.41

5.1

16-3-2. Indoor Unit

0.5

0

0.98

1.47

Voltage (MPa)

40

30

20

10

Characteristic-1

Indoor TA sensor

0

10 20 30 40 50

Temperature [ C]

200

Characteristic-2

150

100

Indoor TC1, TC2, TCJ sensors

20

50 5

0

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Temperature [ C]

0

177

15

10

5.1

16-4. Pressure Sensor Output Check


0 to 4.41MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 4.41MPa)

Voltage check between CN501 d

and e

pins on the outdoor unit interface P.C. board (Tester – rod at e

pin side)

VOLT

0.80

0.82

0.84

0.86

0.88

0.90

0.92

0.94

0.96

0.98

0.66

0.68

0.70

0.72

0.74

0.76

0.78

0.55

0.57

0.59

0.61

0.63

0.65

0.41

0.43

0.45

0.47

0.49

0.51

0.53

0.27

0.29

0.31

0.33

0.35

0.37

0.39

0.14

0.16

0.18

0.20

0.22

0.23

0.25

0.00

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.12

2.79

2.81

2.83

2.85

2.87

2.89

2.91

2.93

2.95

2.97

2.66

2.68

2.70

2.72

2.73

2.75

2.77

2.54

2.56

2.58

2.60

2.62

2.64

2.40

2.42

2.44

2.46

2.48

2.50

2.52

2.27

2.29

2.31

2.32

2.34

2.36

2.38

2.13

2.15

2.17

2.19

2.21

2.23

2.25

1.99

2.01

2.03

2.05

2.07

2.09

2.11

1.80

1.82

1.84

1.86

1.88

1.90

1.91

1.93

1.95

1.97

1.66

1.68

1.70

1.72

1.74

1.76

1.78

1.54

1.56

1.58

1.60

1.62

1.64

1.41

1.43

1.45

1.47

1.48

1.50

1.52

1.27

1.29

1.31

1.33

1.35

1.37

1.39

1.13

1.15

1.17

1.19

1.21

1.23

1.25

1.00

1.02

1.04

1.06

1.07

1.09

1.11

1.27

1.29

1.31

1.33

1.35

1.37

1.14

1.16

1.18

1.20

1.21

1.23

1.25

1.39

1.41

1.43

1.44

1.02

1.04

1.06

1.08

1.10

1.12

0.89

0.91

0.93

0.95

0.97

0.99

1.00

0.76

0.77

0.79

0.81

0.83

0.85

0.87

0.62

0.64

0.66

0.68

0.70

0.72

0.74

Pd

(MPa)

Pd

(kg/cm²)

0.49

0.51

0.53

0.54

0.56

0.58

0.60

5.0

5.2

5.4

5.5

5.7

5.9

6.1

7.7

7.9

8.1

8.3

8.5

8.7

8.9

6.3

6.5

6.7

6.9

7.1

7.3

7.5

13.0

13.2

13.4

13.6

13.8

13.9

11.6

11.8

12.0

12.2

12.4

12.6

12.8

14.1

14.3

14.5

14.7

10.4

10.6

10.8

11.0

11.2

11.4

9.1

9.3

9.5

9.6

9.8

10.0

10.2

0.30

0.31

0.33

0.35

0.37

0.39

0.16

0.18

0.20

0.22

0.24

0.26

0.28

0.41

0.43

0.45

0.47

0.05

0.07

0.08

0.10

0.12

0.14

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.01

0.03

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

Pd

(MPa)

Pd

(kg/cm²)

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

3.0

3.2

3.4

3.6

3.8

4.0

4.2

4.4

4.6

4.8

1.6

1.8

2.0

2.2

2.4

2.6

2.8

0.5

0.7

0.9

1.1

1.3

1.4

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.1

0.3

VOLT VOLT VOLT VOLT

3.79

3.81

3.83

3.85

3.87

3.89

3.91

3.93

3.95

3.97

3.65

3.67

3.69

3.71

3.73

3.75

3.77

3.54

3.56

3.57

3.59

3.61

3.63

3.40

3.42

3.44

3.46

3.48

3.50

3.52

3.26

3.28

3.30

3.32

3.34

3.36

3.38

3.13

3.15

3.16

3.18

3.20

3.22

3.24

2.99

3.01

3.03

3.05

3.07

3.09

3.11

4.79

4.81

4.82

4.84

4.86

4.88

4.90

4.92

4.94

4.96

4.98

4.65

4.67

4.69

4.71

4.73

4.75

4.77

4.53

4.55

4.57

4.59

4.61

4.63

4.40

4.41

4.43

4.45

4.47

4.49

4.51

4.26

4.28

4.30

4.32

4.24

4.36

4.38

4.12

4.14

4.16

4.18

4.20

4.22

4.24

3.98

4.00

4.02

4.04

4.06

4.08

4.10

2.31

2.33

2.35

2.36

2.38

2.40

2.42

2.17

2.19

2.21

2.23

2.25

2.27

2.29

2.06

2.08

1.10

2.12

2.13

2.15

1.92

1.94

1.96

1.98

2.00

2.02

2.04

1.79

1.81

1.83

1.85

1.87

1.89

1.90

1.67

1.69

1.71

1.73

1.75

1.77

Pd

(MPa)

Pd

(kg/cm²)

1.46

1.48

1.50

1.52

14.9

15.1

15.3

15.5

1.54

1.56

1.58

1.60

1.62

1.64

1.66

15.7

15.9

16.1

16.3

16.5

16.7

16.9

18.2

18.4

18.6

18.8

19.0

19.2

19.4

17.1

17.3

17.5

17.7

17.9

18.0

23.5

23.7

23.9

24.1

24.3

24.5

24.7

22.2

22.3

22.5

22.7

22.9

23.1

23.3

21.0

21.2

21.4

21.6

21.8

22.0

19.6

19.8

20.0

20.2

20.4

20.6

20.8

3.23

3.25

3.26

3.28

3.30

3.32

3.09

3.11

3.13

3.15

3.17

3.19

3.21

3.34

3.36

3.38

3.40

2.98

3.00

3.02

3.03

3.05

3.07

2.84

2.86

2.88

2.90

2.92

2.94

2.96

2.71

2.73

2.75

2.77

2.79

2.80

2.82

2.57

2.59

2.61

2.63

2.65

2.67

2.69

Pd

(MPa)

Pd

(kg/cm²)

2.44

2.46

2.48

2.50

2.52

2.54

2.56

24.9

25.1

25.3

25.5

25.7

25.9

26.1

27.6

27.8

28.0

28.2

28.4

28.6

28.8

26.3

26.4

26.6

26.8

27.0

27.2

27.4

32.9

33.1

33.3

33.5

33.7

33.9

31.5

31.7

31.9

32.1

32.3

32.5

32.7

34.1

34.3

34.5

34.7

3.04

30.5

30.7

30.9

31.1

31.3

29.0

29.2

29.4

29.6

29.8

30.0

30.2

4.20

4.22

4.24

4.26

4.28

4.30

4.07

4.09

4.11

4.13

4.15

4.16

4.18

3.95

3.97

3.99

4.01

4.03

4.05

3.82

3.84

3.86

3.88

3.90

3.92

3.93

4.32

4.34

4.36

4.38

4.39

3.69

3.70

3.72

3.74

3.76

3.78

3.80

3.55

3.57

3.59

3.61

3.63

3.65

3.67

Pd

(MPa)

Pd

(kg/cm²)

3.42

3.44

3.45

5.48

3.49

3.51

3.53

34.8

35.0

35.2

35.4

35.6

35.8

36.0

37.6

37.8

38.0

38.2

38.4

38.6

38.8

36.2

36.4

36.6

36.8

37.0

37.2

37.4

42.9

43.0

43.2

43.4

43.6

43.8

41.5

41.7

41.9

42.1

42.3

42.5

42.7

40.3

40.5

40.7

40.9

41.1

41.3

38.9

39.1

39.3

39.5

39.7

39.9

40.1

44.0

44.2

44.4

44.6

44.8

178


0 to 1.47MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 1.47MPa)

Voltage check between CN500 d

and e

pins on the outdoor unit interface P.C. board (Tester – rod at e

pin side)

VOLT

0.86

0.88

0.90

0.92

0.94

0.96

0.98

0.72

0.74

0.76

0.78

0.80

0.82

0.84

0.61

0.63

0.65

0.66

0.68

0.70

0.47

0.49

0.51

0.53

0.55

0.57

0.59

0.33

0.35

0.37

0.39

0.41

0.43

0.45

0.22

0.23

0.25

0.27

0.29

0.31

0.00

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.12

0.14

0.16

0.18

0.20

2.85

2.87

2.89

2.91

2.93

2.95

2.97

2.72

2.73

2.75

2.77

2.79

2.81

2.83

2.60

2.62

2.64

2.66

2.68

2.70

2.46

2.48

2.50

2.52

2.54

2.56

2.58

2.32

2.34

2.36

2.38

2.40

2.42

2.44

2.21

2.23

2.25

2.27

2.29

2.31

1.99

2.01

2.03

2.05

2.07

2.09

2.11

2.13

2.15

2.17

2.19

1.86

1.88

1.90

1.91

1.93

1.95

1.97

1.72

1.74

1.76

1.78

1.80

1.82

1.84

1.60

1.62

1.64

1.66

1.68

1.70

1.47

1.48

1.50

1.52

1.54

1.56

1.58

1.33

1.35

1.37

1.39

1.41

1.43

1.45

1.21

1.23

1.25

1.27

1.29

1.31

1.00

1.02

1.04

1.06

1.07

1.09

1.11

1.13

1.15

1.17

1.19

0.42

0.43

0.44

0.44

0.45

0.46

0.38

0.39

0.39

0.40

0.41

0.41

0.42

0.46

0.47

0.48

0.48

0.34

0.35

0.35

0.36

0.37

0.37

0.30

0.30

0.31

0.32

0.32

0.33

0.34

0.25

0.26

0.26

0.27

0.28

0.28

0.29

0.21

0.21

0.22

0.23

0.23

0.24

0.25

Ps

(MPa)

0.16

Ps

(kg/cm²)

1.7

0.17

0.18

0.18

0.19

0.19

0.20

1.7

1.8

1.8

1.9

2.0

2.0

2.6

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.8

2.9

3.0

2.1

2.2

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4

2.5

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.8

4.9

3.9

3.9

4.0

4.1

4.1

4.2

4.3

3.5

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.7

3.8

3.0

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.4

0.10

0.11

0.11

0.12

0.12

0.13

0.05

0.06

0.07

0.07

0.08

0.09

0.09

0.14

0.14

0.15

0.16

0.02

0.02

0.03

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.01

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

Ps

(MPa)

0.00

Ps

(kg/cm²)

0.0

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

1.0

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5

1.6

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.7

0.8

0.9

0.9

0.3

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.5

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.1

VOLT VOLT VOLT VOLT

3.85

3.89

3.89

3.91

3.93

3.95

3.97

3.71

3.73

3.75

3.77

3.79

3.81

3.83

3.59

3.61

3.63

3.65

3.67

3.69

3.46

3.48

3.50

3.52

3.54

3.56

3.57

3.32

3.34

3.36

3.38

3.40

3.42

3.44

3.20

3.22

3.24

3.26

3.28

3.30

2.99

3.01

3.03

3.05

3.07

3.09

3.11

3.13

3.15

3.16

3.18

4.84

4.86

4.88

4.90

4.92

4.94

4.96

4.98

4.71

4.73

4.75

4.77

4.79

4.81

4.82

4.59

4.61

4.63

4.65

4.67

4.69

4.45

4.47

4.49

4.51

4.53

4.55

4.57

4.32

4.34

4.36

4.38

4.40

4.41

4.43

4.20

4.22

4.24

4.26

4.28

4.30

3.98

4.00

4.02

4.04

4.06

4.08

4.10

4.12

4.14

4.16

4.18

0.75

0.76

0.76

0.77

0.78

0.78

0.71

0.71

0.72

0.72

0.73

0.74

0.74

0.79

0.79

0.80

0.81

0.67

0.67

0.68

0.69

0.69

0.70

0.62

0.63

0.64

0.64

0.65

0.65

0.66

0.58

0.58

0.59

0.60

0.60

0.61

0.62

0.53

0.54

0.55

0.55

0.56

0.56

0.57

Ps

(MPa)

0.49

Ps

(kg/cm²)

5.0

0.49

0.50

0.51

0.51

0.52

0.53

5.0

5.1

5.2

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.9

6.0

6.0

6.1

6.1

6.2

6.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.8

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.8

7.9

8.0

8.0

8.1

8.2

8.2

7.2

7.3

7.3

7.4

7.4

7.5

7.6

6.8

6.9

6.9

7.0

7.1

7.1

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.7

1.08

1.08

1.09

1.09

1.10

1.11

1.03

1.04

1.04

1.05

1.06

1.06

1.07

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.13

0.99

1.00

1.01

1.01

1.02

1.02

0.95

0.95

0.96

0.97

0.97

0.98

0.99

0.90

0.91

0.92

0.92

0.93

0.94

0.94

0.86

0.86

0.87

0.88

0.88

0.89

0.90

Ps

(MPa)

0.81

Ps

(kg/cm²)

8.3

0.82

0.83

0.83

0.84

0.85

0.85

8.4

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.6

8.7

9.2

9.3

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.5

9.6

8.8

8.8

8.9

8.9

9.0

9.1

9.1

11.0

11.0

11.1

11.2

11.2

11.3

10.5

10.6

10.6

10.7

10.8

10.8

10.9

11.4

11.4

11.5

11.5

10.1

10.2

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.4

9.7

9.7

9.8

9.9

9.9

10.0

10.1

1.40

1.41

1.41

1.42

1.43

1.43

1.36

1.36

1.37

1.38

1.38

1.39

1.39

1.32

1.32

1.33

1.34

1.34

1.35

1.27

1.28

1.29

1.29

1.30

1.31

1.31

1.44

1.45

1.45

1.46

1.47

1.23

1.24

1.24

1.25

1.25

1.26

1.27

1.18

1.19

1.20

1.20

1.21

1.22

1.22

Ps

(MPa)

1.14

Ps

(kg/cm²)

11.6

1.15

1.15

1.16

1.17

1.17

1.18

11.7

11.7

11.8

11.9

11.9

12.0

12.5

12.6

12.7

12.7

12.8

12.9

12.9

12.1

12.1

12.2

12.3

12.3

12.4

12.5

14.3

14.3

14.4

14.5

14.5

14.6

13.8

13.9

14.0

14.0

14.1

14.2

14.2

13.4

13.5

13.6

13.6

13.7

13.8

13.0

13.0

13.1

13.2

13.2

13.3

13.4

14.7

14.7

14.8

14.9

14.9

179

17. TROUBLESHOOTING

Confirmation and check

When a trouble occurred in the air conditioner, the check code and the indoor unit No. appear on the display part of the remote controller.

The check code is only displayed during the operation.

If the display disappears, operate the air conditioner according to the following “Confirmation of error history” for confirmation.

CODE No.

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

Check code Indoor unit No. in which an error occurred

Confirmation of error history

When a trouble occurred on the air conditioner, the error history can be confirmed with the following procedure.

(The error history is stored in memory up to 4 errors.)

This history can be confirmed from either operating status or stop status.

3

SET CL

UNIT

1

Procedure

1

Description

When pushing

SET

and buttons simultaneously for

4 seconds or more, the right display appears.

If [Service Check] is displayed, the mode enters in the error history mode.

• [01: Order of error history] is displayed in CODE No. window.

• [Check Code] is displayed in CHECK window.

• [Indoor unit address in which an error occurred] is displayed in UNIT No.

2

3

UNIT No.

R.C.

No.

CODE No.

Every pushing , buttons, the error history stored in the memory is displayed in order.

The numbers in CODE No. indicates CODE No. [01] (Latest)

→ [04] (Oldest).

CAUTION

Do not push CL button because all the error history of the indoor unit will be deleted.

After confirmation, push button to return to the usual display.

2

180

Check method

On the remote controller (Main remote controller, Central control remote controller) and the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit, a check display LCD (Remote controller) or 7-segment display (on the outdoor interface P.C. board) to display the operation is provided. Therefore the operation status can be known. Using this self-diagnosis function, a trouble or position with error of the air conditioner can be found as shown in the table below.

Check code list

The following list shows each check code. Find the check contents from the list according to part to be checked.

• In case of check from indoor remote controller: See “Main remote controller display” in the list.

• In case of check from outdoor unit: See “Outdoor 7-segment display” in the list.

• In case of check from AI-NET central control remote controller: See “AI-NET central control display” in the list.

• In case of check from indoor unit with wireless remote controller: See “Sensor block display of receiving unit” in the list.

Main remote controller display

E01

E02

E03

E04

E06

E23

E25

E26

E28

E15

E16

E18

E19

—

E08

E09

E10

E12

E20

E31

—

—

—

Check code

Outdoor 7-segment display

Auxiliary code

—

—

—

— —

No. of indoor units in which

E06 sensor has been normally received

E07 —

E08 Duplicated indoor addresses

— —

—

E12

E15

—

01: Indoor/Outdoor communication

02: Communication between outdoor units

—

E16

—

E19

E20

00: Capacity over

01

~

:No. of connected units

—

00: Header is nothing

02: Two or more header units

01: Outdoor of other line connected

02: Indoor of other line connected

E23 —

E25 —

E26

No. of outdoor units which received signal normally

E28 Detected outdoor unit number

01: IPDU1 error

02: IPDU2 error

03: IPDU1, 2 error

E31 04: Fan IPDU error

05: IPDU + Fan IPDU error

06: IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error

07: All IPDU error

Terminology

AI-NET : Artificial Intelligence.

IPDU : Intelligent Power Drive Unit

{

: Lighting,

¤

: Flashing, z

: Goes off

ALT. : Flashing is alternately when there are two flashing LED.

SIM : Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED.

AI-NET central control display


Sensor block display of receiving unit

Operation

Timer Ready Flash

—

—

97

04

¤ z z

¤ z z

¤ z z z z

¤

Check code name

Communication error between indoor and remote controller

(Detected at remote controller side)

Remote controller transmission error

Communication error between indoor and remote controller (Detected at indoor side)

Communication circuit error between indoor/ outdoor (Detected at indoor side)

04

42

42

89

97, 99

96

—

96

99

CF z z

¤ z z

¤

¤ z z

¤ z z

¤ z z

¤ z z z z z z

¤ z z z z

¤

¤

¤

Decrease of No. of indoor units

Communication circuit error between indoor/ outdoor (Detected at outdoor side)

Duplicated indoor addresses

Duplicated main remote controllers

Communication error between indoor MCU

Automatic address start error

Indoor is nothing during automatic addressing

Capacity over / No. of connected indoor units

Communication error between indoor units

Outdoor header units quantity error

Judging device

Remote controller

Remote controller

Indoor

Indoor

I/F

I/F

Indoor / I/F

Remote controller

Indoor

I/F

I/F

I/F

Indoor

I/F

42

15

15

15 d2

CF z z z z z z z z z z z z

¤

¤

¤

¤

¤

¤

Other line connected during automatic address

Sending error in communication between outdoor units

Duplicated follower outdoor units

Decrease of No. connected outdoor units

Follower outdoor error

IPDU communication error

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

181

L07

L08

L09

L10

L18

L20

F13

F15

F16

F23

F24

F29

F31

H01

F05

F06

F07

F08

F10


F01

F02

F03

F04

F12

H02

H03

H04

H06

H07

H08

H14

H16

L03

L04

L05

Check code


F15

F16

F23

F24

—

F31

F04

F05

F06

—

—

—

F07

F08

—

F12

F13

H01

Auxiliary code

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

01: TS1 sensor error

02: TS2 sensor error

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

—

—

—

—

—

—

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

H02

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

H03

H04

H06

H07

H08

H14

H16

—

L04

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

—

—

—

01: TK1 sensor error




—

01: TK1 oil circuit system error




—

—

— —

L06

L29

L30

—

L06 No. of indoor units with priority

—

L08

—

L10

L18

L20

—

—

—

—

—

—

01: IPDU1 error

02: IPDU2 error

03: IPDU3 error

L29 04: Fan IPDU error



07: All IPDU error

L30 Detected indoor address

L31 —

0F

0d

93

19

A1

18

18

1b

OC



Check code name


A2

Operation

Timer Ready Flash

¤ ¤ z

ALT

¤ ¤ z

ALT

¤ ¤ z

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ z

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

Indoor TCJ sensor error

Indoor TC2 sensor error

Indoor TC1 sensor error

TD1 sensor error

TD2 sensor error

TE1 sensor error

TL sensor error

TO sensor error

Indoor TA sensor error

TS1, TS2 sensor error

43

18

43

43

43

12

1C

IF

1d

17

44

20 d7 z z z z

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ {

ALT

¤ ¤ z

SIM

¤ ¤ {

SIM z

¤ z

TH sensor error

Outdoor temp. sensor miscabling (TE, TL)

Outdoor pressure sensor miscabling (Pd, Ps)

Ps sensor error

Pd sensor error

Indoor other error

Indoor EEPROM error

Compressor break down z

¤ z

Compressor trouble (lock)

Magnet switch error

Overcurrent relay operation

¤ z

¤ z

¤ z

¤ z

Current detect circuit system error

Comp 1 case thermo operation

Low pressure protective operation

Oil level down detective protection

Judging device

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

Indoor

I/F

IPDU

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

Indoor

I/F

IPDU

IPDU

MG-SW

Overcurrent relay

IPDU

I/F

I/F

I/F d4 z

¤ z

Oil level detective temp sensor error I/F

44 d7

96

96

96

96

88

8A

98

99

99

46 z

¤ z

Comp 2 case thermo operation z

¤ z

Oil level detective circuit error

Magnet switch error

Overcurrent relay operation

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ { ¤

SIM

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ z

¤

SIM

¤ { ¤

SIM

¤ { ¤

SIM

¤ { ¤

SIM

Indoor center unit duplicated

Outdoor line address duplicated

Duplicated indoor units with priority

(Displayed in indoor unit with priority)

Duplicated indoor units with priority

(Displayed in unit other than indoor unit with priority)

Group line in individual indoor unit

Indoor group/Address unset

Indoor capacity unset

Outdoor capacity unset

Flow selector unit error

Duplicated central control addresses

I/F

I/F

MG-SW

Overcurrent relay

Indoor

I/F

I/F

I/F

Indoor

Indoor, I/F

Indoor

I/F

I/F

AI-NET, Indoor

CF b6

—

¤ { ¤

SIM

¤ { ¤

SIM

—

No. of IPDU error

Indoor outside interlock

Extended I/C error

I/F

Indoor

I/F

182

P05

P07

P10

P12

P13

P15

P17

P19

P20


P01

P03

P04

P22

P26

P29

P31

—

—

—

—

—

—

Check code


—

Auxiliary code

—

P03

P04

P05

—

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

01: Phase-missing detection

02: Phase error

P07

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

P10 Detected indoor address

—

P13

P15

01: TS condition

02: TD condition

—

—

P17 —

P19 Detected outdoor unit number

P20 —

0 : IGBT short

1 : Fan motor position detective circuit error

P22 3 : Fan motor trouble

C : TH sensor temp. error

(Heat sink overheat)

D : TH sensor error

P26

P29

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

01: Comp. 1 side

02: Comp. 2 side

P31 —

—

—

—



Check code name


11

1E

21

Operation

Timer Ready Flash z

¤ ¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

Indoor fan motor error

Discharge temp. TD1 error

High-pressure SW system operation

AF

IC

Ob

11

47

AE bb

O8

22

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT z z z

¤

¤

¤

¤

¤

¤

ALT

ALT

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

Phase-missing detection /Phase error

Heat sink overheat error

Indoor overflow error

Indoor fan motor error

Outdoor liquid back detection error

Gas leak detection

Discharge temp. TD2 error

4-way valve inverse error

High-pressure protective operation

1A

14

16

47 b7

97

99

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

¤ z

¤

ALT

By alarm device

—

—

ALT

Outdoor fan IPDU error

G-TR short protection error

Comp position detective circuit system error

Other indoor unit error

(Group terminal unit error)

Error in indoor group

AI-NET communication system error

Duplicated network adaptors

Judging device

IPDU

Indoor

I/F

IPDU

I/F

IPDU, I/F

Indoor

Indoor

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

I/F

IPDU

IPDU

Indoor

AI-NET

AI-NET

AI-NET

Error detected by TCC-LINK central control device

Check code

Central control device indication


Auxiliary code




Operation Timer Ready Flash

C05 — — — —

C06

C12

P30

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Differs according to error contents of unit with occurrence of alarm

— (L20 is displayed.)

Check code name Judging device

Sending error in TCC-LINK central control device

Receiving error in TCC-LINK central control device

Batch alarm of general-purpose equipment control interface

Group control branching unit error

Duplicated central control addresses

TCC-LINK

TCC-LINK

General-purpose equipment

I/F

TCC-LINK

Terminology

TCC-LINK : TOSHIBA Carrier Communication Link.

183

New check code

1. Difference between the new check code and the current system

The displaying method of the check code changes in this model and after.

Check code in current system New check code

Used characters

Characteristics of code classification

Block display

Hexadecimal notation, 2 digits

Few classification of communication/ incorrect setup system

Indoor P.C. board, Outdoor P.C. board, Cycle,

Communication

<Display on wired remote controller>

• [ ] goes on.

• [UNIT No.] + Check code + Operation lamp (Green) flash

<Display on sensor part of wireless remote controller>

• Block display of combination of [ ] [ ] [ ]

<Display on 7-segment in outdoor unit>

Alphabet + Decimal notation, 2 digits











Many classification of communication/incorrect setup system

Communication/Incorrect setup (4 ways), Indoor protection,

Outdoor protection, Sensor, Compressor protection, etc.





















 →

Display

A

C

E

F

Unused

Classification

Central control system error

Communication system error

Each sensor error (Failure)

H

Compressor protective system error

• Unit No. and check code are displayed.

• In a case of error with auxiliary code, check code and sub-code are displayed alternately.

J

L

Unused

Setup error, Other errors

P

Protective device operation

2. Special mention

1) If this model is connected to AI-NET by network adaptor, the different check codes are displayed on the main remote controller (New check code display on new remote controller) and AI-NET central control remote controller (Current system check code display on the current system central control remote controller).

2) The check code is displayed only while the air conditioner is operating (Remote controller start button ON).

When the air conditioner stops and the error is cleared, the check code display on the remote controller also disappears. However, if the error continues after stop of the operation, the check code is immediately displayed with restarting of the operation.

OC

AI-NET central control remote controller

Network adaptor

AI-NET WORK bus

Indoor unit

F10

Wired remote controller

184

18. AIR SPEED CHARACTERISTICS

3.6m

3

2

1

3.6m

3

2

1


2.7m

2

1

2.7m

2

1

0

0

0

0

MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H

0.7m/s

2.8m

2

0.5m/s

1

1

0.3m/s

3 2

MMU-AP0181H

4

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

5m

0.3m/s

3.6m

3

2

1

0

1 2 3

MMU-AP0301H

4 5m 0

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

3.6m

3

2

1

1 2 3

MMU-A0481H

4

1

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

2 3

5m 0

0.3m/s

4

3.6m

3

2

1

5m 0

MMU-AP0151H

0.3m/s

0.5m/s

0.7m/s

1 2 3 4

MMU-AP0241H, AP0271H

5m

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

1 2 3

MMU-A0361H

0.7m/s

4 5m

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

1 2 3

MMU-AP0561H

4 5m

1

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

2 3

0.3m/s

4 5m

185


MMU-

AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH

2.7m

2

1.0

0.5

(m)

1

0 1

0.3

2

Horizontal distance (m)

0.3

3m

MMU-

AP0151WH, AP0181WH

2.7m

2

1.0

(m)

1

0 1

0.3

2


3m

MMU-AP0301WH

2.7

2

1

0

1.0

0.5

0.3

1 2 3


0.3

4

MMU-AP0241WH, AP0271WH

2.7m

2

(m)

1

1.0

0.5

0.3

0 1 2


3m

MMU-AP0481WH

2.7

2

1

0

0.3

1

1.0

0.5

2 3


0.3

4

186


2.7m

H (High wind,

blowing downward)

5.0

2

2.3

1

0

0.4

0.9

0.6

1 2

0.4

3m

MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH

2.7m

L (Low wind,

blowing downward)

4.0

2

2.5

H (High wind,

blowing horizontally)

2.7m

4.5

1.7

1.5

2

0.4

L (Low wind,

blowing horizontally)

2.7m

3.0

0.3

2

1.5

1.1

0.3

1

0.5

0

0.2

0.3

1

0.2

2 3m

1

0 1 2 3m

1

0 1 2 3m

MMU-AP0241SH MMU-AP0151SH,AP0181SH

2.7m

2

1.0

1

0

0.3

1

0.5

2 3m

0.3

2.7m

2

1

0

1.0

1

0.3

2

0.5

0.3

3m

Under ceiling type

MMC-AP0181H,AP0481H

1m

2m

3m

1m

2m

3m

1.0

0.3

0.5

2m 3m

0.5

4m

0.3

1m

MMC-AP015H,AP0241H,AP0271H

1m

0.3

2m

1.0

3m

0.3

0.5

4m

MMC-AP0361H

1m

2m

3m

1m

0.3

2m

1.0

3m

0.65

0.5

0.3

4m

187

High wall type

MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H

Horizontal discharge Initial speed High wind : 5.0m/s

Med. wind : 4.4m/s

5

4

3

2

1

0 1 6 7 2 3 4

Horizontal throw (m)

5

MMK-AP0151H, AP0181H


Med. wind : 4.4m/s

5

4

3

2

1

0 1 6 7 2 3 4


5

MMK-AP0241H


Med. wind : 4.4m/s

5

4

3

2

1

0 1 6 7 2 3 4


5

Floor standing cabinet type

2

1

3

MML-AP0071H, AP0091H MML-AP0121H, AP0151H

3

High wind

Med. wind

Low wind

2

1

High wind

Med. wind

Low wind

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Distance from discharge grille (m)

7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6


7

MML-AP0181H, AP0241H

4

3

2

1

High wind

Med. wind

Low wind

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


8

188

Floor standing type

(m)

2.7

2.0

1.0

(m)

2.7

2.0

1.0

MMF-AP0151H,AP0181H

1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.7m/s

0.5m/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(m)

MMF-AP0361H

2.0m/s

1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(m)

(m)

2.7

2.0

1.0

(m)

2.7

2.0

1.0

MMF-AP0241H,AP0271H

0.5m/s

1.5m/s

1.0m/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(m)

MMF-AP0481H,AP0561H

1.5m/s 1.5m/s 1.5m/s

1.0m/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(m)

High wall type (2 series)

MMK-AP0072H, AP0092H, AP0122H

Horizontal discharge lnitial speed High wind : 4.5m/s

Med wind : 3.7m/s

Low wind : 3.2m/s

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 1 2 3 4


5 6

High

Mid

Low

7

189

19. FAN CHARACTERISTICS

• Concealed Duct Standard type

In case of square duct flange of discharge section


Standard air volume: 480m³/h

140

MMD-AP0121BH

140

120

High-static pressure 2H tap

120


High-static pressure 2H tap it

Application lim

High static pressure 1H tap

100

Application limit


100

80 80

60

40

Standard H tap

Lo w static pressure H tap

Standard L tap

60

40

Standard H

tap

Low

static pressure H

Standard L tap

tap

20 20

0

200

Long life filter

400

Air volume (m³/h)

480

MMD-AP0151BH

140

600


120


0

300

Long life filter

500

Air volume (m³/h)

570

MMD-AP0181BH

140

700



120

100

Application limit


100

Application limit

High static pressure 1H

tap

80 80

60

40

Standa rd H

tap

Low static pressure H tap

Standard L tap

60

40

Standard H tap

Lo w static pressure H tap

Stand ard

L ta p

20 20

0

400

Long life filter

600 650

Air volume (m³/h)

800

0

500

Long life filter

700

Air volume (m³/h)

780 900

190



140

MMD-AP0301BH

140


120 120

100

Application limit


100



Application limit


80 80

Standard H tap

60

40

Standard H tap


Standard L tap

60

40

Low static pressure H

tap

Standard L tap

20 20

0

800

Long life filter

1000

Air volume (m³/h)

1140 1200 1300

0

900

Long life filter

1100

Air volume (m³/h)

1260 1300

MMD-AP0361BH

140

120

100





140


120

Application limit


100

Application limit


80 80

60

40

Standard H tap


Standard L tap

60

40

Standard H tap


Standard L tap

20 20

0

1200

Long life filter

1620

Air volume (m³/h)

2000

0

1400

Long life filter

1800 1980

Air volume (m³/h)

2200

191

• Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type

MMD-AP0181H MMD-AP0241H, AP0271H

1.5

Standard air volume: 900 m³/h

High static pressure tap

1.0

Medium static pressure tap

2.0

Standard air volume: 1,320 m³/h



1.5

0.5

Low static pressure tap


1.0

300

250

200

50Hz

60Hz



250

200



50Hz

60Hz

150

150

Lo w static pressure tap

Lo w

static pressure tap

100

100

50

0

700 800 900 1,000

Air volume (m³/h)

1,100

50

0

1,000 1,100 1,200 1,300

1,320

1,400 1,500

Air volume (m³/h)

1,600

MMD-AP0361H


2.5

2.0



1.5


1.0

250

50Hz

200

Medium

static pressure tap

150

100


50

0

1,400 1,500 1,600 1,700

Air volume (m³/h)

1,800

MMD-AP0481H


3.0

2.5


2.0


1.5

0.5

250


200


50Hz

60Hz

M edium

static pressure tap

150


100

50

0

1,500

2,100

2,000

Air volume (m³/h)

2,500

192

MEMO

193

INSTALLATION MANUAL

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Heat Recovery Type (2 Series)

MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H,

MMU-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,

MMU-AP0301H, AP0361H, AP0481H

MMU-AP0561H

MMU-AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH,

MMU-AP0151WH, AP0181WH, AP0241WH,

MMU-AP0271WH, AP0301WH, AP0481WH*

MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH,

MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH, AP0241SH

MMD-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH,

MMD-AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH,

MMD-AP0271BH, AP0301BH, AP0361BH,

MMD-AP0481BH, AP0561BH

MMD-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,

MMD-AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0721H,

MMD-AP0961H

MMC-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,

MMC-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,

MMK-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,

MMK-AP0072H*, AP0092H*, AP0122H*

MML-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,

MML-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

MML-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH,

MML-AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH

MMF-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H

MMF-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H

MMF-AP0561H

MMY-MAP0802FT8

MMY-MAP1002FT8

MMY-MAP1202FT8

RBM-Y1122FE

RBM-Y1802FE

RBM-Y2802FE

Check of Concentration Limit

New Refrigerant Air Conditioner Installation

• THIS AIR CONDITIONER ADOPTS THE NEW HFC REFRIGERANT (R410A) WHICH DOES

NOT DESTROY OZONE LAYER.

1. SELECTING A LOCATION FOR INSTALLATION

Install the air conditioner certainly at a location to sufficiently withstand the weight.

Perform a specified installation work to guard against a great wind such as typhoon or an earth quake.

The following models must be installed at height 2.5m or more from the floor.

(Concealed type duct type and cassette type air conditioners)

Obtain permission from the customer to install the unit in a location that satisfies the following requirements :

Avoid installing in the following places.

4

1. Outdoor units

2. Outdoor units (Combination of outdoor units)

Allocation standard of model name

3. FS units (Flow selector units)

5

3. Indoor units

6

7

2. SAFETY NOTES

8

3. CHECK POINTS

Check before operation

Heating capacity

Defrost operation in heating operation

Protection for 3 minutes

Main power failure

Fan rotation of stopped unit

Protective device (High pressure switch)

Cooling/ heating operation of Multi system air conditioner

Operating temperature of Super HRM

Characteristics of heating operation

9

4.

KEY POINTS OF AIR CONDITIONER INSTALLATION

10

5. REFRIGERANT PIPE INSTALLATION

Indoor unit installation

Sizing the pipes

Preliminary installation

Flaring

Nitrogen gas blow

MMK-AP0072H, AP0092H, AP0122H*